Chevrolet LUMINA 1997 Owner's Manual

1
1997
1997
1997
1997
1997
'997
/
R ' S
1?
Supplement to the1997 Chevrolet Lumina and Monte Carlo Owner’s Manuals
This is a correction toinformationfound on page 2-34and 2-35 (Lumina)and page 2-34 (Monte Carlo).
Daytime Running Lamps/ Automatic
Headlamp Control
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes
the DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when:
The ignition is on,
The headlamp switch is off and
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL areon, only your reduced intensity
high-beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps,
sidemarker and otherlamps won’t be on.Your
instrument panelwon’t be lit up either.
When it’s dark enough outside, yourDRL will turn off
and yourlow-beam headlamps will turn on.The other
lamps that come on with your headlamps will also
come on.
When it’s brightenough outside, the low-beam
headlamps willgo out and DRLturns on your
high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL
off, set theparking
brake while the ignitionis in OFF or LOCK. Then start
your vehicle.The DRL will stay off until you release
the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, youshould turn on the regular
headlamp system whenyou need it.
97LUMWCARL0001
1
e
/
1
I
This is a correction to informationfound on page 6-58 and 6-59for Lumina and Monte Carlo.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
B
Not Used
C
Power Windows
D
Power Seats
E
Not Used
Fuse
1
Rating Description
Cigar Lighter-- Instrument Panel and
Console Cigar Lighters
Not Used
Not Used
HVAC -- HVAC Control Assembly
Solenoid Box, Mix Motor, DRL Module,
HVAC Control Head, Defogger Relay,
(S.E.O.) Digital Speedometer
Circuit
Breaker
Description
A
Not Used
2
5
Hazard Flasher
6
R.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.)
This isa correction to informution
found on page 6-58 and 6-59for Lumina and Monte Carlo.
Fuse
Rating Description
Fuse
Rating Description
7
Starter Relay
17
Not Used
8
Not Used
18
Not Used
9
Not Used
19
10
YP Electronics Battery -- Chime
Module, Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM), Theft-Deterrent
Module, Radio DLC
Power Accessory #1-- Door Lock
Switches, Trunk Courtesy Lamp,O/S
Mirror Switch, (S.E.O.) Emergency
Vehicle-Rear Compartment Lid Lamp or
Window Panel Lamps
11
Power Accessory##2-- Sunroof Control
Unit, (S.E.O.) Accessory Feed
20
Steering Wheel Control#2 -- Steering
Wheel Radio Controls
12
Anti-Theft/PCM -- Theft-Deterrent
Module, Powertrain Control Module,
(PCM) IGN Syst. Relay
21
Air Bag -- Air Bag System
22
Cruise Control -- Cruise Control Cut-Out
Switch, Cruise Control Module, Turn
Signal Cruise ControlSwitches
23
Stoplamps -- Stoplamp Switch (Brake)
24
Not Used
25
EnglisWMetric (S.E.O.)
26
Not Used
27
Not Used
13
14
ABS -- Electronic Brake Control Module
(EBCM), ABS Relay
HVAC Blower Motor -- Blower Motor
Relay
15
L.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.)
16
Steering Wheel Control #1 -- Steering
Wheel Radio Control Lighting
:
This is a correction to information foundon page 6-58 and 6-59for M i n a and Monte Carlo.
1
Fuse
28
4
Rating Description
CTSY Lamps -- Vanity Mirrors, UP
Compartment Lamp, US Lighted
Rearview Mirror, Dome Lamp
Fuse
Rating
Description
38
Radio -- Radio, Power Drop
39
I/P Electronics Ignition Feed-Headlamp Switch,Instrument Cluster,
Chime Module, Keyless Entry Receiver,
Stoplamp switch (TCC and BTSI)
(S.E.O.) Accessory Switch
40
Not Used
41
Power Drop
29
Wiper -- Wiper Switch
30
Turn Signal -- Turn Signal Flasher
31
Not Used
32
Power Locks -- Door Lock Relay,
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver
33
DRL MDL -- Daytime Running Lamp
Module, (S.E.O.) Accessory Switch
42
Evap. Sol. -- Evaporation Emissions
(EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve
34
Not Used
43
Not Used
35
Not Used
44
Not Used
36
Not Used
45
Not Used
37
Rear Defog -- Rear Window Defogger
Switch Relay
0The 1997 Chevrolet Lumina Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tellsyou how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “air bag” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your Chevrolet.
3- 1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what todo if you have a problem while driving, such
as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you
how to keep your Chevrolet running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you howto contact Chevrolet for assistance and
how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-10.
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quicklyfind
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name LUMINAare registered trademarksof
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includesthe latest information atthe time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after thattime without further notice.For
vehicles first soldin Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your Chevrolet,so it will be
there if you ever needit when you’re on the road.
If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manualit in
so the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10292306 C First Edition
ii
11
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institutefor
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer
a
French LanguageManual:
Aux proprigtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez
votre concessionaireou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, OntarioL5T 1C7
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996
All Rights Reserved
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shified gears from making
carriages to making cars,
forming half the team thatgave
birth to Chevrolet.
Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team,
at the wheel of his experimental “Classic
Six, which enteredproduction in I912.
That year 2999 vehicles were produced.
”
I
I
the
In 1932 Chevrolet
introduced
Synchro-Mesh
transmission
oflered a host of
accessories -- including
such niceties as clock!
1
and
,
- .a
iv
I
I
I
\
The legacy of America'sfavorite
sportscar
began in 1953, when
31
9 hand-assembled
Corvettes
launched
first use of a
fiberglass body in
a production car:
-----------
;
I
I
;
I
t
I
I
I
-1
the
r""'-"--'-"""
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
:,
..::
~
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was poweredby an available fuel-injected V8.
I
I
I
I
I
60's automotive excitement
included Chevrolet landmarks
like the Corvette Sting Ray,
the sporty Camaro, and
powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value.
V
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning
to end when they
first receive theirnew vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learnabout the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together
to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look
for what you need is the Index in
the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list
of all
that’s in the manual, and
the page number where you’ll
find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number
of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt
you if you were to ignore
the warning.
vi
’ A CAUTION:
I
I
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
A You will also find a circle
with a slash throughit in
this book.This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let thishappen.’’
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
I NOTICE:
These mean there
is something thatcould
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you
about something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this
damage
would not becovered by your warranty, and
it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what do
to to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
vii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
Q
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WDSHIELD
WIPER
ee
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
BRAKE
BURNS
COOLANT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
‘tl
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
FLAME
EXPLODE
BATTERY
viii
FOG LAMPS
#0
VENTILATING
FAN
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
k
ENGINE
TURN
SIGNALS
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
are on someof
your controls:
I-1
FUSE -%-
LIGHTER
(a)
a
HORN
SPEAKER
P
m
)a
b
e, p3
(a)
FUEL
0Sectio-- 1
Seats andRestraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Chevrolet and how to use your safety belts properly. You can a
learn about some things you should
not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-6
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-26
1-27
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts-- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Center Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
1-30
1-32
1-34
1-48
1-56
1-59
1-59
1-60
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Children
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tellsyou how to adjust the seatsand
explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
2-Way Manual Front Seat
I A CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicleis not moving.
1-2
Lift the bar under the front
of the seat to unlock it.
Slide
the seat to where you
want it and releasethe bar. Try to
move the seat with your
body to be sure the seat is
locked into place.
Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat (Option)
The driver’s seatmay have a bar and a handle underthe
front edge of the seat.Lift the barto unlock the seat and
to slideit forward and backward.
1-3
Driver’s Side Power Seat (Option)
Reclining Front Seatbacks
FRONT (A): Raise the front of the seat by holding the
switch up. Hold the switch down
to lower the frontof
the seat.
CENTER (B):Move theseat forward or backward by
holding the control to the front
or to the back. Raiseor
lower the seat by holding the control
up or down.
REAR (C): Raise the rearof the seat by holding the
switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the ofrear
the seat.
1-4
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to whereyou want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatbackinto place. Pullup on the lever without
pushing on the seatback, and the seatback will
move forward.
I
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if your vehicle is moving.
Sitting ina reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motioncan be dangerous.Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’tdo their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder beltcan’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could gointo it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’tdo its job either. In a crash the
belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones.
This could causeserious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicleis in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then well
sit
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up
or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in
a crash.
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
This part of the manual tellsyou how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you
some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
Don’t let anyoneride where heor she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse.
You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if youare buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
1-6
It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in theseareas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is ain
seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as areminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in oron anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you
do have a
crash, you don’t know ifit will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, andsome crashes can beso
serious thateven buckled up a personwouldn’t surviveBut most crashes are inbetween. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they
could have been badly hurt
or killed.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheel
After more than25 years of safety beltsin vehicles,
the facts are clear. Inmost crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-7
I
". .
"
Put someone on it.
1-8
The rider
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
doesn't stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel...
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
I be trapped in the vehicle after an
Q: Won’t
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your
chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so
you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if
you are belted.
If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop.
You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts makesuch good sense.
1-10
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in
most of them in the future.But they are
supplemental systems only;so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale
has required theuse of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have tobuckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
@ If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver,but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t yourfault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protectyou from things beyondyour
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety beltsare for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that thereare special things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller
children and babies.If a child will be riding in your
Chevrolet, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-11
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s howwear
to
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
I -
2. Adjust the seat(to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
*
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the beltgo back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-12
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make
sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t longenough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release buttonon the buckleis
positioned so you wouldbe ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you
ever had to.
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt shouldgo
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or
if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
1-13
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
for you.
adjuster to the height that is right
To move it down, squeeze the release lever and move
the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move
the adjuster upjust by pushing upon the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want
it,
try to move it down without squeezing the release lever
to make sure it has lockedinto position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portion
of the
belt is centered on your shoulder.
The belt shouldbe
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-14
&:
What’s wrong with this?
if your shoulder belt is
You can be seriously hurt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose.It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltis
buckled inthe wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Always buckle your beltinto the buckle
nearest you.
-
I
,-
. n
!
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the beltwould apply too much force
to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
~~
&.'
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces.aIf
belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
your dealer tofix it.
I
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely be
to
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push thebutton on the buckle.
The belt should go back outof the way.
Before you closethe door, be sure the belt is outof the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion shouldbe worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-19
~
The best way to protect the fetusis to protect the
mother. When a safety beltis worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in
a crash. For
pregnant women,as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt.See “Driver Position,”
earlier in this section.
When the shoulder beltis pulled out all theway, it will
lock. If it does, let itgo back all theway and start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains theair bag system.
-- one air bag for the
Your Chevrolet has two air bags
driver and anotherair bag for the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about air
the
bag system:
1-20
1
~
’c-A CAUTION:
You can be severelyinjured or killed ina crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a
crash helps reduceyour chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints’’ to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts,but don’t replace them. Air bags
are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where thefront of your vehicle hits
something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear
a
safety belt properly whether or not there’san
air bag for that person.
--
--
1A
rUTION:
,
Air bags inflate withgreat force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep youin position beforeand during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even withair
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR
BAG or the air bag symbol.
AIR BAG
The system checks the air bag electricalsystem for
malfunctions. The light tells youif there is an electrical
problem. See “Air BagReadiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
I
An inflating air bag can seriouslyinjure small
children. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, seethe part of this manual
called “Children” and the caution label on the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
1-21
I
~
How the Air Bag System Works
1
i
L
The right front passenger’sair bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-22
IA
CAUTIO
If something is between an occupant and alr
an
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
air
bag covering.
it can be somewhatabove or below this range.If your
vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts,because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particularcrash, no one can say whether an air
bag shouldhave inflated simplybecause of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation isdetermined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
When should anair bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash.The air bag willinflate
only if theimpact speed is abovethe system’s designed
“threshold level.”If your vehiclegoes straight into a
wall that doesn’tmove or deform, the threshold levelis
about 9 to 15 mph(14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicleis in a crash.The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag.The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the
instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
1-23
How does anair bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupantscan contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags.
Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than
a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after
an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates,
it quickly deflates,so quickly
that some peoplemay not even realize theair bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module in the
steering wheel hubfor the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s bag, will
be hot for a short time.
The parts of the bag that come
into contact with you maybe warm, but not too hot to
touch. There will be somesmoke and dustcoming from
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
prevent the driver from seeing from
or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does
it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
~
When anair bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get outas soon as itis safe to doso.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle afteran air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate
an air bag,
windshields are brokenby vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakagemay also occurfrom the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll needsome new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t getthem, the airbag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will includeair bag modules and
possibly other parts.The service manualfor your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
1-24
1
I
e Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensingand
diagnostic module, which recordsinformation
about the air bag system.The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt
usage atdeployment.
e Let only qualified technicians workon your
air bag system.Improper service can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly.See your dealer
for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Chevrolet
Air bags affect how yourChevrolet should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bagsystem in several places
around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.Your
Chevrolet dealer and the Lumina Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and
the air bag
system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering
for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly.You may have to replace the air
bag module inthe steering wheel or both the air
bag moduleand the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not openor
break the air bag coverings.
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air
bag can still inflateduring improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellowtape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of
the air bag system.Be sure to follow proper
service procedures,and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualifiedto do so.
The air bag system does not
need regular maintenance.
1-25
:
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the
center position.
When you sit in a center seating position, you
have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull
it along the belt.
1-26
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s veryimportant for rear seatpassengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear
seat are hurt more often
in crashes than those who
are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted
can be thrown
out of the vehicle ina crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle whoare wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
To make the belt shorter, pullits free end as shown until
the beltis snug.
Buckle, positionand release it the same way asthe lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety BeltExtender” at the end of this section.
Make surethe release button on the buckleis positioned
so you wouldbe able tounbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
U
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows
have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wearone properly.
When the shoulder beltis pulled out all the way,
it
will lock. If it does,let it go back all the wayand
start again.If the beltis not long enough,see “Safety
Belt Extender”at the endof this section. Make sure
the release buttonon the buckleis positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder beltmay lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across
you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull upon the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
1-28
3. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder
part.
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d
be less
likely to slide under the
lap belt. If you slid underit, the
belt would applyforce at your abdomen. This could
cause serious oreven fatal injuries.The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulderand across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
I
I
The lap partof the belt should be worn low andsnug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
/.
CAULON:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose.In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-29
There isone guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for
children whohave outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installedaon
shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
1-30
1. Pull the elastic cord outfrom between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body
to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Slide the guide under and pastthe belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the beltis not twisted andit lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide
on top.
1-31
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection!That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size.
In’fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children
up to someage must be
restrained while ina vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
Smaller children and babies should
always be
restrained ina child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraintwill say whether it
is the right type and
size for yourchild. A very
4. Buckle, position and release the safety beltas
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” young child’s hip bones are so small thata
regular belt might not stay
low on the hips, as
it
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be overthe
belt crosses the shoulder.
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt
force right on the
child’s abdomen, which could
edges togetherso that you can take them out from the
cause seriousor fatal injuries.So, be sure that
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and any child small enoughfor one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior
body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
1-32
A
heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly becomea 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby
would bealmost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in
an infant restraint.
A CAUTION:
Never holda baby in yourarms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will becomeso
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-33
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
This child restraintis designed for use only by children
who weigh between22 and 60 pounds (10 and 27 kg)
and whose heightis between 33.5 and 5 1 inches
(850 and 1 295 mm) and who are capable of sitting
upright alone.
The child should also be at least one year old.
is It
important to usea rear-facing infant restraint until the
child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives
the infant’s head, neck and body the support they would
need in a crash. See “Child Restraints” later in this
section for more information.
If your vehicle has this option, there’s
a built-in child
restraint in the center rear seat position. This child
1-34
Which slots should I use for my child?
A:
With the child seated on the child restraint cushion,
use the pair of slots that is at or just above the top
of the child’s shoulders.
With this built-in child restraint, youcan adjust the
height of the harness.Depending on the seated height
of the child, you can route it through the upper pair of
slots (A), the middle pair of slots (B) or the lower pair
of slots (C).
For the child shown here, the harness shouldgo through
the middle pairof slots (B).
1-35
&:
What if the top ofmy child’s shoulders isabove
the highest pair of slots?
A:
A child whose shoulders are abovethe highest slots
shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead, the child
should siton the vehicle’s seat cushion and use the
vehicle’s safety belts.
MAKE SURE THE TOP OF THE
CHILD’S
SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS THAT
THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. A CHILD
WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE THOSE
SLOTS COULD BE INJURED DURING A
SUDDEN STOP ORCRASH. IF THE TOP
OF THECHILD’S SHOULDERS IS ABOVE
THE SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT. INSTEAD, THE CHILDSHOULD
SIT ON THE VEHICLE’S REGULAR SEAT
AND USE THE REGULAR SAFETY BELTS.
1-36
Adjusting the Harness Height
1. Lower the child restraint cushion.
c
2. If the left and right halves of the shoulder harness
clip are fastened together, separatethem.
3. If the lap-shoulder harness is buckled, unlatchit by
pushing the button on the buckle.
1-37
4. Pull down the seatback partof the pad (D).
1-38
5. Select one side of the harness. Add some slack to
the
shoulder partby pulling up on the lap part. You’ll
keep most of this slack until you finishStep 9.
.. ,
6. Feed a small amount of harness slack back into
the slot.
7. Twist the harness slightly to remove it from the slot.
I
8. Move the harness up or down to the correct slot.
The
correct slot isthe one that will be ator just above the
top of the child’s shoulder.
1-39
10. Pull on the harness. Make sureisitproperly routed
and isn’t twistedor flipped over.
11. Repeat Steps 5 through 10 for the other side of
the harness.Be sure both sides are adjusted to the
same height.
12. Move the pad back against the child restraint
seatback. Make sure the harness goes through the
slots in the pad that match the height adjustment
slots being used.
13. Press the upperedge of the pad against the
fastener strip.
9. Twist the harness slightly to routeit through the
correct slot.
1-40
Securing a Child in the Built-in Child
Restraint
Don’t use the vehicle’s safety belts.
I
c
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts ona child
seated onthe child restraint cushion can cause
serious injury to the child ina sudden stop or
crash. If a child isthe proper size for the built-in
child restraint, secure the child using
the child
restraint’s harness. But children
who are too
large for the built-in childrestraint should sit on
the vehicle’s regular seat and use the regular
safety belts.
Now that the harness is adjusted to
the correct height for
your child, you’re ready to use the child restraint’s
harness (E) to secure your child.
WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOWTHE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ONTHE USE
OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN
RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKINGTHE
VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURINGA SUDDEN STOP
OR CRASH.
SNUGLY ADJUSTTHE BELTS PROVIDED WITH
THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUNDYOUR CHILD.
1-41
1. If the left and right halvesof the shoulder harness
clip are fastened together, separate them.
2. If the lap-shoulder harnessis buckled, unlatchit by
pushing the button on the buckle.
3. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.
1-42
Be sure the buckleis free of any foreign objects that
may prevent youfrom securing the latch plates.
If
you can’t securea latch plate, see your Chevrolet
dealer for service before using the child restraint.
6. In a single motion,pull the other sideof the harness
all theway out. Keeping the harness pulled all the
way out, place it over the child’s shoulder.
4. Select only one sideof the harness. Pull thelap part
of the harness out, and place
the harness over the
child’s shoulder.
If both sidesof the harness are pulled out, the lap
parts will lock. If the lap parts lock, let both sidesof
the harness go back all theway so each side will
move freely again. Then repeat this step, pulling
only oneside of the harness out.
5. Push the latch plate(Q into the buckle untilit clicks.
7. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.
1-43
Pull an both latch plafesto make sure they are secure.A
green indicator will show in each latchplate window (G).
If the harnesslocks before the latch plate reaches the
buckle, let the harness ga all the way back so it will move
freely again. Then repeat Steps 6 and 7. Be sure to k p
tbe harness pulledall the way out until you buckle it.
Once both sides af the lap-shoulder harness are pulled
out of the retractor and buckled,the harness will. lock.
8. Now fasten the left and right halves
of the shoulder
harness clip together. The indicator window(H) on
the clip will show green when the two halves are
fastened together. The purposeof this clip is to help
keep the harness positioned on the child’s shoulders.
A CAUTION:
I
An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t help keep
the harnessin place on the child’s shoulders.If the
harness isn’t on the child’s shoulders, it
won’t
be able
to restrain the child’s upper i
body
n a sudden stopor
crash. The child could be seriouslyinjured. Make
sure the harness clipis properly fastened.
1-44
9. On both sidesof the harness, pull up on the lap part a
little to be sure it’s locked.
If theharness isn’t locked, orif it becomes too tight,
unfasten the harness clip. Then unlatch the harness
by pushing the button on the buckle, andlet both
sides of the harness go all the way back so they will
move freely again.Then, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
If the harness still doesn’t lock, don’t use the child
restraint. See your dealer tohave the built-in child
restraint serviced.
10. Adjust the positionof the harness on the child’s
shoulders by movingthe clip up or down along the
harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder
part should be centeredon the child’s shoulder.The
harness shouldbe away from the child’s face and
neck, but not fallingoff the child’s shoulders.
1-45
Removing the Child from the Built-in
Child Restraint
2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button
on
the buckle.
1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clin
1-46
3. Move one sideof the harness off the child's
shoulder, and letthe harness go all the way back.
4. Move the other sideof the harness off the child's
shoulder, and letit go all theway back.
5. Remove the childfrom the child restraint cushion.
Storing the Built-in Child Restraint
Always properly store the built-in child restraint before
using the vehicle’s lap belt in the center rear seat position.
1. Buckle the harness and fasten the harness clip.
4. Then press the leg rest firmly intothe seatback, and
secure it by pressing the upper corners against the
fastener strips on the seatback.
2. Fold the child restraintcushion and leg rest up into
the seatback.
3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback.
Just like theother restraint systemsin your vehicle, your
built-in child restraint needs to
be periodically checked
and may need tohave parts replaced after a crash.
See
“Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat
and RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash” in the Index.
1-47
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraint
is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that
it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has
to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance
of personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infantor child
restraint will show you howto dothat.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We at
General Motors therefore recommend that
you put your
child restraint in the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
1-48
’
A child in a rear-facing childrestraint canbe
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rearseat.
You may, however, secure a forward-facing
child
restraint in the right front seat.
Before you secure
a forward-facingchild restraint, always move the
front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. Or,
secure the child restraint in the rear
seat.
Top Strap
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badlyinjured by the right front passenger
air bag if it inflates. Never securea child restraint
m the center front seat. It’s alwaysbetter to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may,
however, secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat,but only with
the seat moved all the way back.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move
around in a collision orsudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle-- even when no child is in it.
If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be
anchored. If you need tohave an anchor installed, you
can ask yourChevrolet dealer toput it in for you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer
can tell
you how todo it.
Canadian law requires that child restraints
have a top
strap, and that the strap
be anchored.
1-49
If your child restraint has
a top strap, your dealer can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designed for this vehicle.
The
dealer can then install the anchorfor you. In Canada,
this work will bedone for you free of charge or, you
may install the anchor yourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
u
You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strapif the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restrainton the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the childin the child restraint asthe
instructions say.
1-50
4. Buckle the belt. Makesure the release buttonis
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you
ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions tobe sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let
it go back all the way.
The safety belt
will move freelyagain and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear SeatPosition
See the earlier part about the top strap if child
the
restraint has one.
n
You’ll be using thelap belt.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured by the right front passenger
air bagif it inflates. Never secure a child restraint
in the center front
seat. It’s always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may,
however, secure a forward-facing
child restraint
in the right front passenger seat, only
but with
the seatmoved all theway back.
1. Make the belt as longas possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
1-52
4. Run the vehicle’s safetybelt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. To tighten the belt, pullits free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.If it isn’t, secure
the restraintin a different placein the vehicle and
contact the child restraint makerfor their advice
about how to attachthe child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work
for an adult or larger
child passenger.
’
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbucklethe
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
Your vehicle has a right front passengerair bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s
why:
‘ I
4. Pick up the latch plate,and fun the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint.The child restraintinstructions
will showyou how.
If the shoulder belt goes
in .front of the child’sface or
neck, put it behind the child restraint,
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back
of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always securerearfacing
a
child restraint in the rear seat.
You’ll be usingthe lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap
if the child restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has
a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat far
as back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.(See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restrainton the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
1-54
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
.
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of
the retractor to setthe lock.
.... ..-
7. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt into
backthe
retractor while you push down
on the child restraint.
8. Push and pullthe child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and letit go back allthe way. The safety belt
will move freely again and
be ready to workfor an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-55
Larger Children
F.lll
If you have the choice,a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear
a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need
to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown outin
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled upcan strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safetybelts.
1-56
Never do this.
Here twochildren are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’tproperly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only oneperson at a time.
&:
A:
What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder beltis
very close to the child’s faceor neck?
Move the child toward the center
of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still
is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
If the
would have the restraint that belts provide.
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” the
in Index.
If the childis so small that the shoulder belt
is still
very close to the child’sface or neck, you might
want to place the childin the center seat position,
the one that has only alap belt.
1-57
JTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in
a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child.If the child wearsthe belt in thisway, in
a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force wouldthen be appliedright on the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion
of the belt
should be worn low and snugon the hips,just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in acrash.
1-58
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you
should useit.
Now and then, make surethe safety beltreminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.If your vehiclehas a
built-in child restraint, also periodically make
sure the
harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look
for any other
loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint
system parts. If you see anything that might keepa
safety belt or built-in child restraint
system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’t longenough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When
you go
in to order it, takethe heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be longenough for you. The extender will
be just for you, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t letsomeone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ain
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, geta new one right away.
If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or
frayed harness strapscan rip apart underimpact forces
just like tornor frayed safety belts can. They may not
protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or
frayed, get a new harness right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-59
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need new safety belts or
built-in child restraint parts?
After a very minor collision, nothingmay be necessary.
But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
straps were stretched,as they would be ifworn during a
more severe crash, then you need
new safety belts or
harness straps.
1-60
If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps
are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also
may mean you will need tohave safety belt, built-in
child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairsmay be necessary even if the safety belt
or built-in child restraint wasn’t being used at the time
of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts.See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section,
a Section 2
Features and Controls
Here youcan learn about the many standard and optional features on your Chevrolet, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that
tell you if everything is
working properly-- and what todo if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-9
2-10
2-1 1
2-13
2-13
2- 14
2-15
2-16
2-20
2-2 1
2-24
2-25
2-25
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
Tntllk
Theft
PASS-Key@I1
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting IntoPARK (P)
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-34
2-35
2-37
2-39
2-4 1
2-4 1
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-46
2-49
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
Horn
Tilt SteeringWheel
Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Lighter
Sun Visors
Auxiliary Power Connection
Sunroof (Option)
Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Keys
a CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
1
The ignition keys are
The ignition keys don’thave plugs. Your Chevrolet
dealer or Roadside Assistance has the
code for
your keys.
Each plug has code
a
on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra door keys. Keep
the plugsin a safe place.If you lose your door keys,
you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using
these plugs.
The door keys are for the
If you need a new ignition key, contact your
Chevrolet
dealer who can obtainthe correct key code, or, in an
emergency, callChevrolet Roadside Assistance at
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872).
I NOTICE:
When a new Chevrolet is delivered, the dealer removes
the plugs from the door keys and gives them to the
first owner.
’1
Your Chevrol.et has a number
of new features
that can help prevent theft. But you can ahave
lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to getin.So be sure you
have extra keys.
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especialIy children can easily
open thedoors and fall out. Whena door is
locked, the insidehandle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow downor stop your vehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrownout of the vehicle ina
crash if the doorsaren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors,and you will be far
better off whenever youdrive your vehicle.
--
--
There are several ways tolock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your door key or remote keyless
entry transmitter if your vehicle hasthis option.
2-4
From the inside, push the lever to lock the door
manually. To unlock, pull the lever.
k
Power DoorLocks
To use the rear door security locks:
Press the powerdoor lock switch tolock or unlock
all doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
The lever on each reardoor works only that door’s lock.
It won’t lock or unlock all the doors.
Rear Door SecurityLocks
When these locksare set, the insidedoor handles will
not open the rear doors. Be sure to let adults and
older cluldrenknow how the,locks work and how to
cancel them.
1. Open the rear door. Use a key to move the leverall
the way up.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing on the other rear door.
To open a door when the security locks are set, unlock
the doorfrom the inside andthen open the door using
If you want to cancel the
the outside door handle.
security locks, move the lever
down.
3.-c
1-U
Leaving Your Vehicle
I
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry(If Equipped)
If your Chevrolet hasthis option, youcan lock and
unlock your doorsor unlock your trunk from
about
3 feet (1 m) up to30 feet (9 m) away using theremote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter operates
on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry and
Science Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may notcause harmful interference,
and (2)this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210of Industry and
Science Canada. Operationis subject to thefollowing
two conditions:(1) this device may notcause
interference, and(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operationof the device.
Changes or modifications to this system
by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normalfor any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work
or if you have
to stand closerto your vehiclefor the transmitter to
work, try this:
Check to determineif battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Takea few stepsto the left or right,
hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.
If you’re still having trouble,see your Chevrolet
dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Operation
Press UNLOCK once to
unlock the driver’s door.
Press UNLOCK again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors;
pressing UNLOCK will also
cause the vehicle’s interior
lamps to come on for a
period of time--(see
“Sustained Interior
Illumination” in the Index
for more details).
Each remote keyless entry transmitteris coded to
prevent another transmitterfrom unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitteris lost or stolen, areplacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you
go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches
the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any
remaining transmitters
must alsobe matched. Once your dealer
has coded the
new transmitter,the lost transmitter willnot unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle canhave only four transmitters
matched toit.
To lock both doors, pressLOCK. To unlock the trunk,
press the trunksymbol on the transmitter. The trunk will
only unlock if your transaxleis in PARK (P); pressing
LOCK or thetrunk symbol will alsocause the vehicle’s
interior lamps to come on for a period of time--(see
“Sustained Interior Illumination”in the Index for
more details).
2-7
Battery Replacement
Under normaluse, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last abouttwo years.
You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal rangein any location. If you haveto
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time tochange the battery.
For battery replacement, use type CR2032or
an equivalent.
I NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch To replace the battery:
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
1. Insert a flat object like dime
a
into the slot on the
back
of
the
transmitter.
Gently
pry apart the front
transferred to these surfaces may damage
and back.
the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replaceit with the new one,
making sure the positive (+) side of the batteryis
facing down.
3. Snap the top and bottom together; make sure the
halves are together tightly so water won’t getin.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try
synchronizing the transmitter with your receiver,
(located in your vehicle).
2-8
Synchronization
Synchronization may be necessarydue to the
security method used by this
remote keyless entry
system. The transmitter does not send the same signal
twice to the receiver.The receiver will not respond to a
signal it has previously been sent.This prevents
someone from recording andplaying back the signal
from the transmitter.
To resynchronize the transmitter withthe receiver, do
the following: While standing close to your vehicle,
simultaneously press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter for about five seconds. The
door locks should cycle (lock and unlock) toconfirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Trunk
I
A C’ WTION:
It can be dangerous to drivewith the trunklid
open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gascan
come intoyour vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.
If you must drivewith the trunk lid openor if
electrical wiringor other cable connections must
pass through theseal between the body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure all windows are shut.
l b r n the fan on your heatingor cooling
system to its highest speedwith the setting
on VENT. That will force outsideair into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
0 If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them
all the way.
See ‘(Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-9
Trunk Lock
~ ; ~ ", ~
, , I":
~
.V.?
4
,,
i .
.
, ,,
/ , x "'%.E.l,"
L * I
, , . -
.
~
Remember, your trunk canbe opened at any time using
this lock release, so be sure to lock your doors.
+'
., .
"'
i
'
,
To unlock the trunk from
the outside, insert the door
key and turnit. You can
also use the remote keyless
entry function if your
vehicle has this option.
Just press the trunk symbol
on the transmitter, making
sure your shift leveris in
PARK (P).
Remote Trunk Release (Option)
Press the button under the
instrument panel on the
driver's side. Your transaxle
shift lever must be in
PARK (P).
2-10
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your Chevrolet has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put it
oncan make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the
keys inside, it's an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don't do it.
When you park your Chevrolet and open the driver's
door, you'll hear a chime reminding you to remove your
key from the ignition and takeit with you. Alwaysdo
this. Your steering wheel willbe locked, andso will
your ignition and transaxle. And remember
to lock
the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lightedspot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember tokeep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area,or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you parkin a lot wheresomeone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to
lock it up and take your keys.
But whatif you have to leave your ignitionkey? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like yourtrunk
or glove box.
Lock the glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
P A S S - K ~ ~11@
Your vehicle isequipped
with the PASS-Key I1
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key I1 is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.
PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key
that matches adecoder in your vehicle.
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
2-11
i
-
When the PASS-KeyI1 system senses that someoneis
using the wrong key,it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter
won’t work and fuel won’tgo to the engine.If someone
tries to start your vehicle againor uses another key
during this time, the vehicle will not start. This
discourages someonefrom randomly trying different
keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make
a match.
The ignition key mustbe clean and dry before it’s
inserted in the ignition or the engine may not
start. If the
engine does not start and the SECURITY light on,
is the
key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.
If you accidentallyuse a key that has a darnaged
or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work and the
SECURITY light will comeon. But you don’t haveto
wait three minutes before trying another ignition
key.
See your Chevrolet dealeror a locksmith who can
service the PASS-KeyI1 to have a new key made.
If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will
be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key I1 system, however, is
not working properly and mustbe serviced by your
Chevrolet dealer.Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key I1 system.
If you loseor damage a PASS-KeyI1 ignition key, see
Clean and dry the key.
Wait about three minutes andtry
your Chevrolet dealeror a locksmith who can service
again. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made. an
In emergency,
to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and
try
call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Center at
another ignition key. At this time, you may also want
to
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872).
check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your
vehicle needs service.If your vehicle doesstart, the first
ignition key may be faulty.See your Chevrolet dealer or
a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key
11.
2-12
Ignition Positions
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your modern Chevroletdoesn’t need an
elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better
in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for thefirst
200 miles (322km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yetbroken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline
every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.
--
--
With the ignition keyin the ignition switch, youcan turn
the switch to five positions:
ACC (A): This position lets you use things
like the
radio and windshield wipers when theengine is off. To
use ACC, push in the key and turnit toward you. Your
steering wheel will stay locked.
LOCK (B):Before you put the key
into the ignition
switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’s also the only position
in which you can remove your key.This position locks
It’s a
your ignition, steering wheel and transaxle.
theft-deterrent feature.
2-13
OFF (C): This position lets youturn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel.It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK.Use OFF if you must have your Move your
vehicle
pushed
or towed.
RUN @): This position is where thekeyreturns
after yau start your vehicle. With the engineoff, you
can use RUN to display someof your warning and
indicator lights.
START (E):This position starts your engine.
A waning chime will soundif you open the driver’s
door when theignition is in OFF,LOCK or ACC and
the key is in the ignition.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, besure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your
hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition. switch.If none of this works, thenyour
vehicle needs service.
2-14
Starting Your &@e
shift lever to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine
won’t
start
other
any
position
in
-- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
I NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do,you could damage the
transaxle, Shiftto PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushingthe accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key toSTART.When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be
drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can
damage yourstarter motor.
2. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops),it
could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try
pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as youhold the key in
START for up to 15 seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Engine CoolantHeater (Option)
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle’’ in the Index.
In very cold weather,0”F (- 18O C) or colder, the engine
coolant heatercan help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimumof
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcoTd, located
behind the vehicle’s passenger side headlamp fixture.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.
Automatic TransaxleOperation
1
Plugging thecord intoan ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured.Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon't reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for
at least 15amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as
it was before to keepit away
from moving engine parts.If you don't, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer dependson the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, weask that you contact
your Chevrolet dealer in the area where you'll
be
parking your vehicle.The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
2-16
Your automatic transaxle mayhave a shift lever on the
steering column or on the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speedis limited on automatic
transaxle vehicles, whenyou're in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline componentsfrom
improper operation.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use whenyou start yourengine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
’
~
It is dangerous to
get out of your vehicle if the
shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer’’ in
the Index.
Make sure the shift leveris fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your Chevrolet hasa brake-transaxle
shift interlock.You must fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. If you cannot shft out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into
PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down.
Release the shft lever button if you havea console shift.
Then move theshift lever out of PARK(P), being sure to
press the shift lever button if you have a console shift. See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R)
while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift toREVERSE (R) only after yourvehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to out
get of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle,
see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-17
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, yourengine
doesn’t connect withthe wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@):This position is
for normal driving.If you need more power
for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all theway down.
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engineis “racing” (running at
high speed)is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered
by your warranty.
2-18
You’ll shift down to the next
gear and have
more power.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly, or
if it seems not to shift gears you
as go faster,
something maybe wrong with your transaxle;
your vehicle may default toSECOND (2).
However if you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged.So if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,you
can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (03) for higherspeeds.
DRIVE (D): This position is also used for normal
driving, butit offers more power andlower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@).
Here are some times you mightchoose DRIVE (D)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@):
0
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0
When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
0
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy.You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, butthen you would alsowant to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drivein SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (41 km) at speeds over55 mph
(88 kmk), or you can damage your
transaxle. Use DRIVE(D) orAUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (0)
as much as possible.
Don’t shift into SECOND(2) unless you are going
slower than65 mph (105 kmk), or you can
damage your engine.
2-19
FIRST (1): This position givesyou even more power
(but lower fuel economy) thanSECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud.If the
shift lever is putin FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear untilthe vehicle isgoing slowly enough.
I NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t
try to
drive. This mighthappen if you werestuck in
very deepsand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This couldoverheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)
to holdyour vehicle in position ona hill.
2-20
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake pedal
down with your rightfoot.
Push down the parking
brake pedal with your
left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your
left
foot, the parking brake pedal will
follow it to the
released position.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake
on can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to
replace them, andyou could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” inthe Index. That section shows
what todo first to keepthe trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
1 A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get outof your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) ivith the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, vehicle
the
can move suddenly. You or otherscould be
injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps
that follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in theIndex.
2-21
I
Column Shift
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever intoPARK (P) position
like this:
Move the lever upas far as it will go.
3. Move the ignition keyto LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
Pull the lever toward you.
2-22
!
I
Console Shift
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and
set the parking brake.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
2. Move the shift leverinto PARK (P) position
like this:
Hold in the buttonon the
lever, and push the lever
all the way toward the front
of your vehicle.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle withthe ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
It canbe dangerous toleave your vehicle with the
engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you
leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could
overheat andeven catch fire.You or otherscould
be injured.Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine runningunless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the
engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK(P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever
into the PARK (P)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if
you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you (or,
if you have the
console shift lever, without first pushing the button).
If
you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked
into PARK (P).
2-23
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parhng on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in
the transaxle.You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To
prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find outhow, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque locK does occur,you may needto nave another
vehicle push yours little
a uphill to take some
of the
pressure from the parlung pawl in the transaxle,
so you
can pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
Your Chevrolet has a brake-transaxle shift interlock.
You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN.
See
“Automatic Transaxle Operation” in
the Index.
If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift leverby pushing it all theway into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the
shift lever buttonif you have aconsole shift. Then move
the shift lever out
of PARK (P), being sure to press the
shift lever buttonif you have a console shift.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift outof PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end
of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and shift tothe drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon
as you can.
I
2-24
Parking Over Things That Burn
.......... ..
-0.
I.
I..,.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can't see or
smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
0 Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren't done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaustsystem had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out anyCO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
A CAUTION:
It’s better not to park with
the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here aresome things to know.
I
A CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in placecan let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fanswitch is at the highestsetting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in placecan be a blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
1
2-26
--
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always setyour parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to
be sure your vehicle won’t
move, See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking ona hill and if you’re pullinga
trailer, alsosee “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Window.
On a vehicle wlm manual windows, use
the window
crank to open andclose each window.
Power Windows (Option)
The driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the bottom
of the
switch, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the bottomof the switch is pressed all the
way down, the window willgo all the way down.
To stop the window while itis lowering, pressthe front
of the switch. To raise the window, pressand hold the
front of the switch.
The driver’s window controlsalso include a lock-out
switch. PressLOCK OUT to stopfront and rear
passengers from using their window switches.The
driver can still control all the windows with
the lock on.
Press the switch againfor normal operation. When the
orange band onthe switch is showing, the passengers
can operate their windows.
Horn
Press onor along the top edgeof your steering wheel
horn symbolsto sound the horn.
Switches on the driver’sdoor armrest control eachof the
windows when the ignitionis on. In addition, each of
the passenger’s doors has a switch
for itsown window.
2-27
Tilt Steering Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjust the steering
wheel beforeyou drive. You
can also raise it to the
highest level to give your
legs more room when
you
exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever as pictured. Movethe steering wheel toa
comfortable level, then release the lever lock
to the
wheel in place.
2-28
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward(for right) and two
downward (for left) positions.These positions allow you
to signal a turnor a lane change.
To signal a turn, movethe lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrowon the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
As you signal a turnor a lane change,if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’tgo on at all when you
signal a turn,check for burned-out bulbs and check the
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers’’ in the Index).
Headlamp High/LowBeam
To change your headlamps
from low beamto high
beam, or high to low, pull
the multifunction lever all
the way toward you. Then
release it. When the high
beams are on, a light on the
instrument panelalso will
be on.
To signal alane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete yourlane change. The lever will returnby
itself when you releaseit.
2-29
v
WIPER
I
For steady wiping at low speed, turn
the band to LO. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further,
to HI. To stop
the wipers, turn the band to
OFF.
You can set the wiper speed
for a longor short delay
between wipes.This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band tochoose the delay time.The
closer toLO, the shorter the delay.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Be sure to clear ice
and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
If your bladesdo become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
2-30
: I
I
When you apply your brakes, thecruise control
shuts off.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
t
I
0
0
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator.This can really help onlong trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph
(40 km/h).
2-31
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shutsoff the cruise
control, but you don't need to reset it when you want to
resume your previous speed.
I
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
a button and
you're not using cruise, you might hit
go into cruisewhen you don't want to.You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch OFF until you wantto use it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push in theSET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your footoff the
accelerator pedal.
2-32
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your footoff the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down tothe cruise control speed youset earlier.
1. Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push theSET button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at thehigher speed.
2. Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it
there until you get up to the
speed you want, then
release the switch. (To increase your speed in very
small amounts, move the switch to WA. Each time
you do this, your vehicle willgo about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster).
The accelerate feature will only work after you set the
cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways toreduce your speed while using
cruise control:
0 Push in the SET button until you reachthe lower
speed you want, then release it.
0 To slow down in very smallamounts, push the SET
button for less than half a second. Each time you
do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well yourcruise control will work on hills
depends
upon your speed, loadand the steepnessof the hills.
When goingup steep hills, you mayhave to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you mayhave to brakeor shift to alower gear
to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the
cruise control:
0 Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR
0 Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turn offthe cruise control orthe ignition, or
shift intoPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), your cruise
control set speed memoryis erased.
2-33
Exterior Lamps
SidemarkerLamps
0
InstrumentPanelLights
CourtesyLamps
-:q-Turn the knob to this symbol (C) to turn on the
headlamps and other operating lamps.
PC Turn the knob to this symbol(B) to turn on the
parking and other operating lamps without the
headlamps.
Turn the knob toOFF to turn off the lamps.
A warning chime will sound when you turn the ignition
switch to OFF, LOCK or ACC with the lampson.
Daytime Running LampdAutomatic
Headlamp Control
The lamp controls are onthe instrument panel. They
control these systems:
Headlamps
Taillamps
ParkingLamps
LicenseLamps
2-34
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make
it easier for
others to see the front
of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
A light sensoron top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when:
1
0
The ignition ison,
0
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your low-beam
headlamps willbe on. The taillamps, sidemarker and
other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t
be lit up either.
When it’s dark enough outside, your low-beam
headlamps will change to full brightness. The other
lamps thatcome on with your headlamps willalso
come on.
When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps will
go out, and your low-beam headlampschange to the
reduced brightness of DRL.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
You can brightenor dim the instrument panel lamps by
moving the dial (A). If you turn the dial all the way up,
your courtesyor interior lamps willcome on.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door is opened, several lamps
come on. These
lamps are courtesy lamps.They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle.You can also turn these
lamps on by moving the dial near the headlamp knob
all
the way up.
Some of the lamps have switches so you can turn them
on, even when the doors are closed.
These lamps are
reading lamps. To avoid draining your battery, sure
be to
turn off all reading lamps when leaving your vehicle.
To idle your vehicle withthe DRL off, set the parking
brake whilethe ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start
your vehicle.The DRL will stayoff until you release the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn
on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
2-35
Sustained Interior Illumination
Your courtesy lamps willcome on and stayon for a set
time whenever you:
0
Open a door.
0
Press UNLOCK onthe remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
0
Press LOCK on theremote keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped).
0
Press the trunk symbol on theremote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
open
If you open a door, thelamps will stay on while it’s
and then turn off automaticallyabout 18 seconds after
you close it. If you don’t open a door, the lamps will
turn off after about18 seconds, unless you press
2-36
UNLOCK or TRUNKon the remote keyless e n q
transmitter. If you press UNLOCKor TRUNK and
don’t open a door, the lamps will turn
off after about
55 seconds. If you press LOCK on the
remote keyless
entry transmitter, the lamps will turn
off about
17 seconds after all thedoors are closed.
Sustained interior illumination includes a feature called
theater dimming. With theater
dimming, the lamps don’t
just turn off at the endof the delay time. Instead, they
slowly dim during the delay
time until theygo out. The
delay time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to
RUN or START, so the lamps willgo out right away.
When the ignition is
on, sustained interior illumination
is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps won’t
come on,
Rearview MirrorReading Lamps
Battery Saver
Your vehcle has a feature to help prevent you
from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
courtesy lamps on.If you leave the dial turnedall the
way up, orif you leave adoor open, thelamps will
automatically turnoff after 10 minutes ifthe ignition
is off.
These lamps go on when you open the doors. When
the doors are closed,turn the lamps on and off with
the switches.
Manual Outside Mirrors
Adjust the right mirror
by
hand. To adjust the left
mirror, move theknob in
the directionyou want to
move the mirror.
To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, push the
lever forward (to the night position).
To return the
mirror to the day position, pull the lever toward
you.
2-38
Power Outside Mirrors(If Equipped)
The power mirror controlis
on the driver's door. Turn
the control to the left to
adjust theleft rnirror orto
the rightto adjust the right
mirror. Then move the
control in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s sidemirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Storage Armrest
To use the storage area, fold
down the armrest. Press the
latch on the front edge and
pull up. To use the
cupholder, flip it forward.
A convex mirror can make things
(like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before Instrument Panel Cupholder
changing lanes.
To use this cupholder,
slide it out of the
instrument panel.
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Use the door key to lock and unlock theglove box. To
open, lift the latch.
2-39
Door Storage Compartments
Convenience Net (Option)
Each of the doors has a storage compartment.
Center Console
'1
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You'll see it
just inside the backwall of the trunk.
To open the storage area, press the button and lift the
cover. The consolehas a cassette and CD storage bin
and a cupholder. To use the cupholder for large cups,
remove the insert.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them fiom falling over during'sharpturns or
quick startsand stops.
The net isn't for larger, heavier loads. Storethem in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you're not using it.
2-40
Ashtrays and Lighter
The center front ashtray may beon the instrument panel
or on the console. To remove the instrument panel
ashtray, open it, push down on the locking taband pull
out the ashtray.
For the console ashtray, openthe lid and lift out the
ashtray using the snuffer.
NOTICE:
Don't hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand
while it is heating.If you do,it won't be able to
back away fromthe heating element when it's
ready. That can makeit overheat, damagingthe
lighter and the heating element.
Your vehicle mayhave a rear ashtray.It is located within
a small doorat the rear of your console
or rear of your
front seat storage armrest. Push on the right of
side
the
Sun Visors
door. The ashtray will then rotate to the right
for usage.
You
You can only access the ashtray by pushing on the door's To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
can also move themfrom side to side.
right side.To remove the ashtray, push down on the
snuffer located in the middle of the ashtray and lift it out.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
NOTICE:
Don't put papers and other things that burninto
your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
To use the lighter, just push it in all theway and let go.
When it's ready, it will pop back by itself.
2-41
Open thecover to expose the vanity mirror. Forthe
driver’s mirror, slide thecover to the side. For the
passenger’s mirror,lift the cover.The lamps will come
on when you open the coveron the passenger’s visor.
Floor Mats (Option)
3. Use a screwdriver to screw the locator post
into the
vehicle’s carpeting. Press down while turning to
allow the locator “auger point” to pierce the floor
carpet. The locator will not screw down tightly, but
will rotate freely when installed properly.
Usage
4. To remove the mat, pullup on the rearof the mat to
B).
un-snap itfrom the locator post (see view
5. To re-install the mat, align the grommet in the mat
over the locator post and push down
to snap the mat
into place (see viewB).
I
Auxiliary Power Connection
~
View A
View B
Installation
1. Move the driver’s seat toits most rearward position.
2. Locate the driver’s side floor matin the vehicle with
the rear of the mat against theleft (outboard) front
A).
edge of the seat track mounting bracket (see view
Il
i
Your vehicle isequipped
with auxiliary power leads.
These leads can be used
to power aftermarket
electrical equipment
added to your vehicle.
They are located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle,
below the glove box and behind whatis referred to as a
“hush panel.” For additional informationon accessing
these leads and electrical hookup, please refer to your
service manual.
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damageit or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
Sunroof (Option)
Your sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a sliding
sunshade. The sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors just ahead of the sunroof and works only when
the ignition is on.
To open the glass panel and sunshade, press the rear
of
the switch.Let go of the switchto stop the panelin any
position. Press thefront of the switch toclose the glass
panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot
be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
2-43
Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
!-44
A.Vents
E. Audio System
B. Instrument Cluster
E Ashtray and Lighter
C. Climate ControVRear Defogger
G. Remote Trunk Release
D. Glove Box
H. Lamp Controls
2-45
Instrument Panel Cluster
TEMPERATURE
SECURITY
Standard Cluster: United States Version Shown, Canadian Similar
Your instrument clusteris designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle
is running. You’llknow how fast
you’re going, about how much
fuel is in your tank and manyother things you need to drive safely and economically.
2-46
Optional Cluster: United States Version
Shown, Canadian Similar
2-47
Speedometer/Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer letsyou see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). Your
odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven in
either miles (used in the United States)
or in kilometers
(used inCanada).
Your Chevrolet has a tamper-resistant odometer.
If you
see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know
someone has probably tampered with
it and the numbers
may not be correct.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed.If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that
is what will
be done.If it can’t, then it will
be set at zero anda label
must be put on the driver’s
door to show the old mileage
reading when thenew odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer tells howfar you have driven since
you last resetit. To set it to zero, press the reset button.
2-48
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
\
1,
RPM
I NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in
the red area, or engine damage
may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gagescan signal that somethingis
wrong beforeit becomes serious enoughto cause an
expensive repairor replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could
also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem withone of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lightscome on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are
familiar with this section, you should notbe alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may beor is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and
warning lights work together to let
you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on
when youare driving, or whenone of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt
is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stayon
until the driver’s belt
is buckled.
2-49
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIRBAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks theair bag’s electrical systemfor
malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical
problem. The system check includes theair bag sensors,
the air bag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the air
bag system,see “Air Bag” inthe Index.
AIR BAG
This light willcome on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the systemis ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays
on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-50
The air bag readiness light should flash
for a few
seconds whenyou turn the ignition key toRUN. If the
light doesn’tcome on then,have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
Charging System Light
VOLTS
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,as
a checkto show you it’s
working. Then it should
go out.
If it stays on,or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the charging system.
It could
indicate that you have a loose drive belt or another
electrical problem. Haveit checked right away. Driving
while this lightis on could drain your battery.
If you must drive ashort distance with the light on,
be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your Chevrolet’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other partcan
still work andstop you. For good braking, though, you
need bothparts working well.
If the warning light comes on,there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key toRUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there’s
a problem.
If the lightcomes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is
harder to push. Or,the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, or if the
anti-lock brake system warning lightis flashing, have
the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.)
1
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light ison
still
or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing
after you’ve pulledoff the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light
will alsocome on when you set your parking brake.
The
light will stayon if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brakeis fully
released, it means youhave a brake problem.
2-51
I
_-
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
(Option)
ANTI LOCK
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light willcome
on when you start your
engine and it will stay
on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
Your regular brake system may not be working
properly if the anti-lock brake system warning
light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock brake
system warning light flashing can lead
to an
accident. After you’ve pulled
off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
on
anti-lock brakes and there could be a problem with yourthe ignitionoff. Or, if the light comes on and stays
when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn
regular brakes. Pulloff the road and stop carefully.
You
the
ignition
off.
Then
start
the
engine
again to reset the
may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal
system. If the light still stays on, or comes
on again
may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop.
while you’re driving, your Chevrolet needs service.
If
Have the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing Your
the lightis on but not flashingand the regular brake
Vehicle’’ in the Index.)
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’thave anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come
on briefly when you turn the ignition keyRUN.
to If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there is a problem.
2-52
Anti-Lock Brake System Active Light
(Option)
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
the anti-lock brake system
active light willcome on.
Slippery road conditions may
exist if this light comes
on, so adjust your driving accordingly. The light will
stay on for a few seconds after the system stops
adjusting brake pressure.
The anti-lock brake system active lightalso comes on
briefly when you turn the ignition key
to RUN. If the
light doesn’tcome on then, have it fixed so it will be
there to tell you when the systemis active.
Engine Coolant Temperature Light
1
This light tells you that
your engine coolant has
overheated or your
radiator cooling fan(
s)
HOT
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off
the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” inthe Index.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
n
You have a gage that shows
the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves intothe red
area, yourengine is too hot!
That reading means thesame thing as the warning light.
It means that your
engine coolant has overheated.If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle andturn off the engine as soonas possible.
In “Problems on the Road”, this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
2-54
ow Coolant Warning Light
LOW
COOLANT
If this lightcomes on, your
system is low on coolant
and theengine may
overheat. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index and
have your vehicle serviced
as soonas you can.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
I
Your Chevrolet is equipped
with acomputer which
monitors operationof the
fuel, ignition andemission
control systems.
This system is called OBDI1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life
of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner
environment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by
Enhanced Diagnostics.) The SERVICE ENGINE SOON
light comes on to indicate that there aisproblem and
service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light shouldcome on, as acheck to show youit is
working, whenthe ignition is on andthe engine is not
running. If the light doesn’tcome on, have it repaired.
This light will alsocome on during a malfunctionin one
of two ways:
0
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-55
If the LightIs Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
0
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashingand remains on steady,see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
1
If the light continuesto flash, when itis safe todo so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the keyoff, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remainson steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer ox qualified service centerfor service.
2-56
I
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap.The diagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or
missing fuel cap will allowfuel to evaporate intothe
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the
cap properly
installed should turn the light
off.
Did you just drive through adeep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may
be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when
the electrical system
dries out.A few driving trips should turn the light
off.
Have you recentlychanged brands of fuel?
Oil Warning Light
If so, be sure tofuel your vehicle with qualityfuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poorfuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected bythe system and cause the light
to turnon.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will requireat least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff,
have your dealeror qualified service centercheck the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
7 3
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on after you start your
engine, orcome on when
you are driving.
OIL
This indicates thatoil is not going through your
engine
quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could
be low onoil or could have some other oil problem.
Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in two other situations:
0
When the ignition is on but theengine is not running,
the light will come on asa test to show youit is
working, butthe light will go out when you turn the
ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or
bulb. Haveit fixed right away.
2-57
-
Low Oil Level Light
1CAU 1 . K “
L
-
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure
is low. If
you do, your engine can become
so hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned.
Check your oilas soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
LOW
OIL
Your engine is equipped
with anoil level monitoring
system. When the ignition
key is turned on, theLOW
OIL light will briefly flash.
If the light does not flash,
have it fixedso it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
I
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
by
problems can be costly and is not covered
your warranty.
I
2-58
If the light stays on,stop the vehicleon a level surface
and turn the engineoff. Check theoil level using the
engine oil dipstick. (See “Engine Oil” in the Index.)
If
the light does not flash,
have the low oil level sensor
system repairedso it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil level
during the brief period between key on and engine
crank. It does not monitor the engine oil level when the
engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check
is
only performedif the engine has been turned
off for a
considerable periodof time, allowing theoil normally in
circulation to drain back
into the oil pan.
Change Oil Soon Light
CHG OIL
SOON
The CHANGE OIL
SOON light should come
on as a bulb check when
you start the engine. If
this light stays on for about
20 seconds after you turn
on theignition, have the
oil changed.
When to change your oil also depends on driving habits
and conditionsbecause they directly affectengine speed,
coolant temperature and vehicle speed.Because of this,
the CHANGE OIL SOON light maycome on as early as
2,000 miles (3,200 km) or less for harsh conditions.
Remember, afterchanging your engine oil, the system
must be reset; with the ignition keyin the RUN position,
but the engine off, fully push and release the accelerator
pedal three times withinfive seconds. If the CHANGE
OIL SOON lightflashes two times, the system is reset.
However if the light comes on and stays onfor five
seconds, it did notreset. You’ll need toreset the
system again.
Security Light
SECURITY
This light willcome on
when you turn the key to
START and stay on until the
vehicle starts. It willalso
come on and stay on if your
key is too dirtyor wet for
the PASS-Key I1 system to
read the resistor pellet.
If the resistor pelletis damaged or missing, the light
will flash.
If you’re driving and the lightcomes on andremains on,
your PASS-Key I1 system is not working properly.Your
vehicle is not protectedby PASS-Key 11, and you should
see your dealer.
2-59
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how muchfuel you
have left when the ignition
is on. When the indicator
nears EMPTY (E), you still
have a littlefuel left, but
you should get moresoon.
2-60
Here are some things owners ask about. All these
situations are normaland do not show a problem with
your fuel gage:
0
At the service station, the pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
0
It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gage
indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated
the tank was half full, butit actually tooka little more
or less than half thetank's capacity tofill it.
0
The gage movesa little when you turn a corner
or
speed up.
b
NOTES
2-61
b
2-62
NOTES
0Section 3
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section,you'll find out how to operatethe comfort control andaudio systems offered with your Chevrolet.
Be
sure to readabout the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Ventilation Tips
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
3-6
3-8
3- 12
'
3-15
3-17
3-18
3-18
3- 19
3-20
3-20
AM-FM Stereo
AM-F" Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player and
Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio SteeringWheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your AudioSystem
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls
With these systems,you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilationin your vehicle.The systems work best if
you keep your windows closed while using them.
Fan Knob
The right knob with thefan symbol selects the forceof
air you want. To turn the fan off, turn the knob
to “0”.
Temperature Control
If your system does not
have the auxiliary temperature
control option, the center knob
changes the temperature
of the aircoming through the system. Turn this knob
toward red (clockwise) for warmer air. Turn
it toward
blue (counterclockwise)for cooler air.
If your system doeshave the auxiliary temperature
control option, the center levers
change the temperature
of the air coming through the system.
The DRIV lever
sets the temperaturefor the driver and rear seat
passengers, and thePASS lever sets the temperature
for the front seat passenger. For maximum defroster
performance, setthe DRIV and PASS levers at
full warm.
3-2
Mode Knob
*e
f
l VENT This setting brings in outsideair and
The left knobhas several settings to control the direction directs it throughthe instrument panel outlets.
of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a
0
FLOOR: This setting sends mostof the air
comfortable setting.
through the ducts near the floor.
The rest comes outof
MAX: This setting recirculates much of the
air inside
the defrost and side window vents.
your vehicle and sendsit through the instrument
w e
panel outlets.The air conditioning compressor will run
DEFOG: This setting allows half ofthe air to go
automatically in this setting unless
the outside
to the floor ducts and halfto the defrost and side
temperature is below 40°F (4°C).(Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature.) window vents. The air conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting unless the outside
A/C: This setting brings in outside air and directs it
temperature is below 40°F (4°C).(Even when the
through the instrument panel outlets. The air
compressor is running, youcan control the temperature.)
conditioning compressor will run automatically in this
DEFROST This setting directs mostof the air
setting unlessthe outside temperature is below
through the defrost and side window vents. Some
of the
40°F (4°C). (Even when the compressor is
air goes to thefloor ducts. The air conditioning
running, youcan control the temperature.)
compressor will run automaticallyin this setting unless
+e
the outside temperatureis below 40°F (4°C).(Even
+fl BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in the outsideair
when the compressor is running, you can control
and directs it two ways. Halfof the air is directed
the temperature.)
through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the
remaining air is directed throughthe floor ducts and a
little to the defrost and side window vents.The air
conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this
setting unless theoutside temperature is below
40°F (4°C). (Even whenthe compressor is
running, you can control the temperature.)
+’
+fl
9
3-3
Air Conditioning
Heating
On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let On cold days useFLOOR with the temperature control
hot, inside air escape.
This reduces the A/C compressor
all theway in the red area.The system will bring in
load, which should help fuel economy.
outside air, heatit and send it to the floor ducts.
For quick cool-down on veryhot days, useMAX with
the temperature control allthe way in the blue area.If
this setting is usedfor long periodsof time, the air in
your vehiclemay become toodry.
For normal cooling on hot days, use
A/C with the
temperature control in the blue area.
The system will
bring in outside air and
cool it.
If your vehicle has an
engine coolant heater, youcan use
it to help your system
provide warm air faster when it's
cold outside(0°F (-18°C) or lower).An engine coolant
heater warms the coolant your
engine and heating
system use to provide heat.
See "Engine Coolant
Heater" in the Index.
Ventilation System
On cool but sunny days, the
sun may warm your upper
body, but your lower body may notbe wann enough. You
can use BI-LEVEL with the temperature control in the
middle. The system will bring in outside
air and direct it to
your upper body, while sending slightly warmedair to
your lower body. You may noticethis temperature
difference more at some times than at others.
Adjust the directionof aifflow by moving the
louvered vents.
3-4
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside airinto the vehicle whenit is moving. Outside
air will also enterthe vehicle whenthe air conditioning
fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
0 For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle.
0 Keep the hood and front air inletfree of ice, snow or
any other obstruction,such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will workfar better, reducing the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
0 When you entera vehicle in cold weather, setthe
mode toFLOOR and the fan to the highest
speed for
a few moments before driving off.
This helps clear
the intake ductsof snow and moisture and reduces
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
0 Keep the air path underthe front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Defogging and Defrosting
Your system has two settings for clearing thefront and
side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use
DEFROST with thetemperature knob(s) all the way in
the red area.To warm passengers while keeping the
windows clean, use DEFOG.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger
uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear
window. Press the button to
It will turn itselfoff after about ten minutes. If you turn
it on again, thedefogger will only runfor about five
minutes before turningoff. You can also turn it off by
turning off the ignition or pressing the button again.
Do not attachanything like a temporary vehicle license
or decal across thedefogger grid.
3-5
I NOTICE:
AM-FM Stereo
Don’t usea razor blade or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Audio S stems
Q7
Your Delco audio system has been designed to operate
years of listening pleasure.You will get the
easily and give
most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your Delco system can
do and how to
Playing the Radio
operate all its controls,
be sure
to you’re getting the most out
VOLUME: This knob turnsthe system on and off and
of the advanced engineering that went into it.
controls the volume.To increase volume and turn the
Setting the Clock for Systems with
radio on, turn the knob clockwise.Turn it
Automatic Tone Control
counterclockwiseto decrease volume.
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears. Press
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition
off by
and hold MN until the correct minute appears.
pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio
is playing,
Setting the Clock for Systems without
press this button to recall the station frequency.
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. SET will appear on the display forfive
seconds. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the right
arrow on the SEEK button until the correct minute
appears. Press and hold the
left arrow on the SEEK
button until the correct hour appears.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lowerknob to switch betweenAM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the rightor left arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
SCAN: Press and holdone of the SEEK arrows, then
press the other SEEK arrow;SCAN will appear on the
display. UseSCAN to listen to stations for a few
seconds. The radio will go to a station,stop for a few
seconds, thengo on to the next station. The radio will
scan up or downthe radio band, depending on the arrow
you pressedfirst. Press both SEEK arrows or the upper
knob to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four numbered buttons,
within five seconds. The sound willmute. When it
returns, release the button.Whenever you press that
numbered button,the station youset will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET willappear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. When it
returns, release the buttons. Whenever
you press the
same buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps foreach pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increaseor
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the leverup or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a stationis weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upperknob to move
the sound tothe left or right speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind thelower knob to move
the sound to thefront or rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
In addition tothe four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on
each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons atthe same time. Just:
3-7
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press thisknob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn theknob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwiseto decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display thetime with the ignitionoff by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall station frequency.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV, your
3-8
audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road
and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volumeat the
desired level.Move the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust theSCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the same
to you as you drive.
If you don't want to useSCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each detent onthe control ring allowsfor
more volume compensation at a faster rate
of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between
AM, FMl
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push theknob back into its stored
position when you're not using it.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or
lower station. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and holdone of the SEEK arrows for two
seconds until SCAN appears on the display. SCAN
allows you to listen to each station for a few seconds.
The radio willgo to a station,stop for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. PressSEEK again to stop
scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
I
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numberedpushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radioon.
will appear momentarily just before the frequency is
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan
through
both FM 1 and FM2 preset stations andFM1 or FM2 will
appear on the display.
2. Press AM-FM to selectthe band.
Setting theTone
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.
5 . Press andhold one of the six numbered buttons.The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return
and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will
also be
automatically selectedfor that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to
each of your
favorite stations stored onyour pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scanthrough each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons,except those stations with
weak reception.The AUTO TONE setting storedfor
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is inthe P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1-P6)
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass andcounterclockwise to
decrease bass. Whenyou use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch tomanual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase trebleand counterclockwise
to decrease treble. Whenyou use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a stationis weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE:This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings
designed for
classical, news,rock, pop, country/western and jazz
stations. C/W willappear on the display whenyou first
press AUTO TONE.Each time you press it, another
setting willappear on the display. Pressit again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTOTONE display willgo
3-10
NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the SEEK rightarrow to
search for the next selection onthe tape. If you hold the
button or press it more than once,the player will
continue moving forward through the tape.Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for NEXT or SEEK to work.The tape
direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation.
The sound will muteduring NEXT or SEEK operation.
Press thisbutton or one of the SEEK arrows again to
return tonormal play.
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return toplaying speed. The radio will
play the last-selected stationwhile the tape reverses.
00 (5): Press this button toreduce background
noise. Note thatthe double-D symbol will appear
on the display.
Dolby@Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.
Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Pressthe button again to return
to playing speed.The radio will play the last-selected
station whilethe tape advances.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
TAPE AUX:Press this button tochange to the tape
function whenthe radio is on. The tape symbol with an
arrow willappear on the display whenthe tape is active.
If your system is equipped with a remote playback
device, pressingthis button a second time will allow
the
remote device to play.
EJECT Press this button toremove the tape. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated witheither the
ignition or radiooff. Cassettes may be loaded with the
radio offif this buttonis pressed first. If you leave a
cassette tapein the player while listening to the radio, it
may become warm.
CLN: If this messageappears on the display,the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will
still play
tapes, but you should cleanit as soonas possible to
prevent damage tothe tapes and player.See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After
you clean
the player, press and hold
EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display--- to
show the indicator was reset.
3-11
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped)
and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the
control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the same you
to as you drive.
If you don’t want to use
SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each detent on the control ring allows
for
more volume compensation at a faster rate
of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2.The display shows your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press thisknob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume,turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwiseto decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when
the ignition is off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road
3-12
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnit to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right or left
arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use
SCAN to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio will go to
a station, stopfor a few seconds, thengo on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.
The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numberedpushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn theradio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select
the equalization that
best suits the typeof station selected.
5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons.The
sound will mute.When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set willreturn and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will
also be
automatically selectedfor that button.
6. Repeat the steps foreach pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that
pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press P.SCAN or
one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. PSCAN
will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the PSCAN
mode. The channel number (Pl-P6) will appear
momentarily just before the frequency is displayed.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turnthe
knob clockwise to increase bass andcounterclockwise to
decrease bass. Whenyou use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting willswitch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase trebleand counterclockwise
to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting willswitch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a stationis weak
or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you tochoose preset
bass and treble equalization settings
designed for
classical, news, rock,pop, country/western and jazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting willappear on the display. Pressit again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, ifyou use the BASS and TREB
knobs,
control will return to them and
the AUTO TONE
display will go blank.
3-13
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise for the right speakers and
counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
PREV (1): Press this button or the leftSEEK arrow to the
start of a current track.If you hold the button or press
it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The soundwill mute while seeking.
FADE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers RDM (2): Press this button to hearthe tracks in random,
and counterclockwisefor the rear speakers.The middle
rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will show on
position balances the sound between the speakers.
the display. Press RDMagain to turnoff random play.
RDM is reset tooff when the disc is ejected.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions
when
you’re not using them.
NEXT (3): Press this button or
the right SEEK
arrow to goto the next track.If you holdthe button
Playing aCompact Disc
or pressit more than once,the player will continue
Insert a disc partwayinto the slot, label side up.
The
moving forward through the disc.
The sound will mute
player will pullit in. The disc should begin playing. The while seeking.
display will showCD and the CD symbol.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
If you’re driving on a veryrough road or if it’s very hot, within a track. Releaseit to play the passage. You can
ERR (error) may appearon
the disc may not play and
use the counter reading on
the display to locate a
the display. PressRECALL to takeERR off the display.
passage more easily.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play.
If
FWD (6): Press andhold this button to advance
the disc comes out,it could be that:
quickly within a track. Release
it to resume playing.You
The disc is upside down.
can use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage
easily.
0 It is dirty, scratched or wet.
3-14
RECALL: Press this button tosee which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long it has been playing (elapsed time).The track
number also appears when you change the volume or
when a new track starts to play.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio whena disc
is in the player.The letters CD will go off the display.
CD AUX: Press this button tochange to the disc
function when the radio is on. A CD icon will appear on
the display whenthe disc is in the player, whether it is
active or not.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio
will play. The disc will start at thefirst track when you
reinsert it.
If you turn off the ignitionor radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system,the disc will start playing where it
was stopped.If you press EJECT but don't remove the
disc, the player willpull the disc back in to protect it
after about one minute. If you leave a compact disc
in the playerwhile listening to the radio,it may
become warm.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It worksby using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power removed.
is
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature.
If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated,the radio will display
LOC to indicatea locked conditionanytime battery
power is removed.If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio withthe secret code
before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions whichfollow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended thatyou read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow morethan 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step
4.
3-15
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After
a
Power Loss
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
3. Turn the radio off.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number whichyou have written down.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the firstone or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will showREP to letyou know that you
need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to letyou know that your radiois secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turnedoff.
3-16
3. Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radiois
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrongcode eight times,INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can
try again. When you
try again, you will only have threechances to enterthe
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera Power Loss”earlier in
this section.
2. Turn the radio off.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last twodigits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will show---,indicating that the radiois
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery poweris removed and later applied to
a
secured radio, the radio won’t
turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
G
PRESET
SEEK: Press the up arrow
to tune to the next radio
station and the down arrow
to tune to the previous
radio station.
AM FM
If a cassette tape orcompact disc is playing, the player
will advance with theup arrow and rewind with the
down arrow.
PRESET Press this button to play
a station you have
programmed on the radio preset buttons.
3-17
AM-FM: Press this button tochoose AM,FMl or FM
2. If a cassette tapeor compact disc is playing,it will
stop and the radio will play.
I
VOLUME: Press the up or
down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
Understanding Radio Reception
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But
FM signals
will reach onlyabout 10 to 40 miles (16to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere withFM signals, causing
the sound tocome and go.
AM
rne range for mostAM stations is greater thanfor FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other.
AM can pick
up noise from things likestorms and power lines.Try
reducing the trebleto reduce this noiseif you ever get it.
PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape
or
compact disc when the radiois playing.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press
it
again toturn on the sound.
3-18
I
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise
is almost undetectable
until itis too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound thatseems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume control
on your radio toa safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
0
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
I NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like atape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
inteflere with the operationof your vehicle’s
engine, Delco radio or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’ssystems may interfere
with the operationof sound equipmentthat has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobileradio and telephone units.
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes aordamaged
mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly ormay cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player shouldbe cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may displayCLN to indicate
that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer.If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but you should clean
it as
soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try
a
known good cassette tosee if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassettehas no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done witha scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
is normalfor the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough
cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette
is
available through your Chevrolet dealership.
You may also choosea non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which usesa cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type
of cleaning cassette will not
eject and,it may not clean as thoroughly as the
scrubbing type cleaner.
Care of Your Compact Discs
ItHandle discs carefidly. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampena
clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
After you clean the player, press and hold
EJECT for
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will slightly bent,you can straighten it out by hand. If the
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
mast is badly bent, asit might beby vandals, you should
replace it.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette Check every once in
a while to be sure the maststill
is
tape is in good condition before
you have your tape
tightened to the fender.
player serviced.
3-20
0Section 4
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve
also
included manyother useful tips ondriving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4- 10
4- 12
4-13
4-14
4-15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4-17
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-25
4-29
4-3 1
Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyonecan give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Chevrolet: Buckleup. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads
or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestriansor other driversare going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be readyfor their mistakes.
Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventableof
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving.
You never
know when the vehicle in front
of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-2
Death and injury associated withdrinEclng and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number
one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But
what if peopledo? How muchis “too much” ifthe
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although itdepends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinlung depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
The amount of alcohol consumed
Muscular Coordination
The drinker’s body weight
Vision
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
Attentiveness.
Police records show that
almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deathsare the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years,some 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use
of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population-- choose never to drink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21,
it’s againstthe law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychologicaland
developmental reasons for these laws.
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According tothe American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three12-ounce
(355 ml) bottlesof beer in an hour will endup with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the
same BAC by drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks
if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin
or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach
a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the
same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states setsthe legal limitat a BAC
of 0.10 percent.In a growing numberof U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is
0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent
after three tosix
drinks (inone hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,it
depends on how much alcoholis in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
1
But the abilityto drive is affected well below a BAC
of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many peopleare impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects
are worse at night. All
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
Statistics show that the chance
of being in a collision
increases sharplyfor drivers whohave a BAC of
BAC would be close to0.12 percent. A person who
of
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
somewhat lower BAC level.
0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chanceof having a
collision.
At a BAC level
of 0.10 percent, the chance of
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collision
is 12 times greater; at a
a lower relative percentage
of body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater!
4-4
The body takesabout an hour to rid itselfof the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up.“I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer.What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when child
a
darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able
to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that whenanyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then drlving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes,perceptions, attentivenessand
judgment can be affected by evena small amount
of alcohol. You can havea serious or even
fatal collision ifyou drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designatea driver who will
not drink.
--
--
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Brakir
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where
you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involvesperception time and reaction time.
a
-
First, you have to decide to push
on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot anddo it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average.It might be less with one driver
and as long as two
or three secondsor more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in
3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot
of distance inan emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or
gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight
of the
vehicle and the amount
of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow
or ice, it’s
easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means
you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peopledrive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a
mistake. Your brakes may nothave time to cool between
hard stops.Your brakes will wearout much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep
pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means
better brakingand longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brakes (Option)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS
is
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help
prevent a braking skid.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.
If you do, the
pedal mayget harder to pushdown. If your engine
stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake.
Once the power assistis
used up, it may take longerto stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
If your vehiclehas anti-lock brakes, the brake pedal will
say so.
4-7
And this warning lighton
the instrument panel will
come on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
ANTI LOCK
When you start your engine,or when you beginto drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You
may hear a momentary motor
or clicking noise while
this testis going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem withthe anti-lock brake system, the
anti-lock brake system warning light will stay
on or
flash. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light’’ in
the Index.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with
ABS.
A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down.If one
of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.
4-8
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster Remember: Anti-lock doesn’tchange the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
stopping distance.If you get too close to the vehicle in
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
front of you, you won’thave time to applyyour brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop,
even though youhave
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the system
working, or you may notice some noise, but thisis normal.
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
this light willcome on. See
“Anti-Lock Brake System
Active Light” in the Index.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, yourcomputer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed andcontrols braking pressure accordingly.
4-9
Braking in Emergencies
Steering
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situatian
that requires hard btaking.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine
stops or the systemis not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner,
each of us is subject to
the same lawsof physics when driving on curves.
The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn
the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle goingin the same direction.If you’ve ever
on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
tried to steer a vehicle
The traction you can getin a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-10
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems -- steering and braking-- have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have four-wheel
anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you’re steering through a
sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate.Those two
control systems -- steering and acceleration -- can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control.
What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease up on the
brake or accelerator pedal,steer the vehicle theway you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions.Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to
go slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can
be more effective
than braking.For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, ora child darts outfrom between
parked carsand stops right in frontof you. You can
avoid these problemsby braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s thetime for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your Chevrolet can perform very well inemergencies
like these. First applyyour brakes -- but, unless you
have anti-lock’ notenough to lock your wheels. (See
“Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is
better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
If you need toreduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enterthe curve, whileyour front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust yourspeed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to
accelerate until youare out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime thatyour right wheelshave
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended9 and 3 o’clock positions,you can
turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. Butyou have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straightenthe wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact thatsuch emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the levelof the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery shouldbe fairly easy. Easeoff the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing the
in way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
0
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially ifyou’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’thave adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenlyslows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move
so you will be
increasing speed as thetime comes to move into the
other lane.If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a
“running start” that more than makes up
for the
distance you wouldlose by dropping back.And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and
drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
The driver of a vehicleabout to passanother on a
two-lane highway waitsfor just the rightmoment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes
back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily!Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, sincethe
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration anger
or
can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
0
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for trai5c signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a signup ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross
a solid
line on your side of the lane ora double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But takecare that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember toglance over your shoulder andcheck
the blind spot.
4-13
0
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane
change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When
you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal
and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem tobe farther awayfrom you
than it really is.)
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seekan escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three typesof skids correspond to your Chevrolet’s
three control systems.In the braking skid, your wheels
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
next vehicle.
much speed or steering incurve
a
causes tires to slip and
0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causesthe driving wheels to spin.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your footoff the accelerator pedal.
a If you’re being passed, make
it easy for the
following driver to get ahead
of you. Perhaps you
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
can ease a little to the right.
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the
vehicle togo. If you start steering quicklyenough, your
Loss of Control
vehicle may straighten out. Alwaysbe ready for a
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
second skidif it occurs.
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to
do what the driver has asked.
a Try not to pass morethan one vehicle at a time
4-14
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material ison the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It isimportant to slow downon slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Driving at Night
._
...........
.........................
.- ..........
..........
_
.....”.
..-I--.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surfaceis slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a“mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when youhave any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in abraking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), releaseenough pressure on the brakes
to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling,
you will have steering control.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired
-- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-15
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror
to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especiallyon higher speed roads.Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watchfor animals.
0
If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as wellat night as in the daytime. Butas
we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old
driver may requireat least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytimecan also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
if you’re
have less trouble adjusting to night. But
driving, don’t wear sunglassesat night. They may cut
4-16
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can takea second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare(as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at nightis made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light far
up less of a
roadway when youare in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; thatway, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Justas your headlamps shouldbe
checked regularly for proper aim,so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble. Ona wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate
or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good ason dry roads.
And, if your tires don’thave much tread left, you’llget
even less traction. It’s always
wise to go slower andbe
cautious if rain starts to fall while youare driving. The
surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes
are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Evenif your
windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signsand traffic signals,
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape andkeep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking
or missing
areas on the windshield, or when stripsof rubber startto
separate from the inserts.
4-17
I
A CAUTION:
I
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddleof water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or even
going through some car washes
can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-18
I
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they
can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your
tires do not have much treador if the pressure inone or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of wateris standing on
the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds.There
just isn’t a hard andfast rule about hydroplaning.The
best advice is to slow down whenit israining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0 Turn on your low-beam headlamps
-- not just
your parking lamps-- to help make you more
visible to others.
0
Besides slowing down, allowsome extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room
ahead, and be preparedto have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-19
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the cityjust as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and
just before you
start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersectionor may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streetsis the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want
to watch out for
what the other driversare doing and pay attentionto
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear viewof the freeway as you
drive aiong-the entranceramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed.Switch onyour turn signal, check
your mirrors andglance over your shoulderas often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate
if it's slower.Stay
in the rightlane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes,check your mirrors.Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane,glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn't another vehicle in your
"blind" spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways,parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow -a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slowerat night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well inadvance. If you miss your exit,do not,
under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic andkeep to the right.Drive at the same
speed mostof the other driversare driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit rampcan be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left lane on afreeway as a passing lane.
4-21
The.exit speed is usually posted.
e
a
0
e
*
e
0
4-22
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the humthe
of tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it
happen toyou! If it does, your vehiclecan leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First,be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, witha
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep youreyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Checkyour rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pull off the road
into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving inflat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle ingood shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling
system
and transaxle.These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
0
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing toknow is this: let yourengine do some of the
slowing down.Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep orlong hill.
h you don’t shift down, your brakescould
get so hot thatthey wouldn’t workwell. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down ahill. You could crash. Shift down let
to
your engineassist your brakeson a steep
downhill slope.
4-24
Coasting downhillin NEUTRAL (N)or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could getso
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor brakingor even none going downa hill.
You could crash. Always haveyour engine running
and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
0
Stay in your own lane when driving
on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
0
As you go over the top
of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
0
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area
or winding
roads. Be alert to these and
take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
1
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in goodshape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brushor broom, a supply
of windshield washerfluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will
be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-25
Driving onSnow or Ice
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Verycold
snow or ice canbe slick and hard to driveon. But wet
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet theice can be even more trouble becauseit may offer the
road probably have good traction.
least tractionof all. You can get wetice when it’s about
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and freezing (32°F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
the road,you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
can get there.
have a lot less traction or “grip”
and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow-- drive with caution. Accelerate gently.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
’ see “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
This system improves
your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whetheryou have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping
sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let
up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get
the most traction you can.
4-26
Remember, unless youhave anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheelsstop rolling, you’lljust slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and youcan
still steer.
0
Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
0
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may
remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear.If
you see a patchof ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not tobrake while you’re actually on
the ice, andavoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things todo to summon help and
keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-27
1
I
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to
alert police that
you’ve been stoppedby the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything youcan wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing keep
to warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, butbe careful.
4-28
,A C AJTTON:
Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t seeit or smell it, so you might not
know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time tosure
be snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on
the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the
wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves
fuel. When you runthe engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the
battery charged. You will needa well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with yourheadlamps. Let the heater runfor awhile.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat.
Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle anddo some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP.
WT.
CTR.
FRT.
RR.
TOTAL LBS.
KG
,
\
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY
WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE SIZE
SPEED
PRESSURE
PSIIKPa
RTG
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight
it
may properly carry.The Tire-Loading Information label
is inside the trunk lid.
The label tells youthe proper size,
speed rating andrecommended inflation pressuresfor
the tires on your vehicle.It also gives youimportant
information about the numberof people that can be in
your vehicleand the total weight youcan carry. This
includes the weightof all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
4-29
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, A N D THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
i
The other label isthe Certification label, found onthe
rear edge of the driver’s door.It tells you the gross
weight capacityof your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicleor the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)for either the front or
rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load,spread it out. Don’t carry
more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.
4-30
Do not load your vehicle any heavrer
than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or itcan changethe way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control.
Also, overloading canshorten the life of
your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle
-- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anythingelse -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If
you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Towing a Trailer
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
0 Put things inthe trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured childrestraint in
your vehicle.
0 When you carry something insidethe
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
If you don’t usethe correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously
injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed
all the
steps in this section. Ask your Chevrolet
dealer
for advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this
part, and see your Chevrolet
dealer for important information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
4-31
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if
it is equipped with
proper towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle
trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section. But traileringis different thanjust
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In
it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that
of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder
against the dragof the added weight.The engine is
required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generatingextra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
4-32
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig willbe legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this
information can be stateor provincial police.
0
Consider using a sway control.You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
0
Don’t tow a trailerat all during thefirst 1,000 miles
(1 600 km)your new vehicleis driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts couldbe damaged.
0
Then, during thefirst 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear
at the
in
heavier loads.
0
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than
55 mph (90 kmh)) to
save wearon your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
0
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safelybe?
It shouldnever weigh more than 1,000 pounds(450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to useyour rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull a
trailer areall important. And,it can also depend on any
special equipment that youhave on your vehicle.
‘You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)of any trailer is animportant
weight to measurebecause it affects the total capacity
weight of your vehicle.The capacity weight includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo you may carry in
it, and thepeople who willbe riding in the vehicle. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the
tongue
load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your
vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too.See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in theIndex for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-33
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tiresare inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires.You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label (found inside the trunk
lid) or see “Loading Your Vehicle”in the Index. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weightof the trailer tongue.
B
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are
some rules to follow:
The bumpers on your vehicleare not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitchesor other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight(B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight
(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, tosee if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you maybe able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-34
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.
\
!
I
!
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer.Cross the safetychains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided
by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Followthe
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.
Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brake
system must not be used with your vehicle.
If everything checks out this far, thenmake the brake
fluid tapat the upper rear master cylinder port. But
don’t usecopper tubing for this. If you do, it will
bend and break off.Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount
of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with
the feel of
Trailer Brakes
handling and braking with the added weightof the
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read and trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearlyas
follow the instructions for the trailer brakes
so you’ll be
responsive as your vehicleis by itself.
able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do nottry to tap
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
into your vehicle’sbrake system. If you do, both
lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has
brake systems won’t work well,or at all.
electric brakes,start your vehicleand trailer moving and
Even if your vehicle doesn’thave anti-lock brakes,
then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure
don’t tap into your vehicle’s
brake system if
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
the trailer’s brake system will use more than
electrical connection at thesame time.
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
During yourtrip, check occasionally to be sure that the
master cylinder. If it does, both braking systems
load is secure, and that the
lamps and any trailer brakes
won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This
can helpyou avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towinga trailer. And, because you’rea good deal
longer, you’ll need togo much farther beyond the
passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to left,
the justmove that hand
to the left.To move the trailerto the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
4-36
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact
with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharpturns while trailering.
When you’re turning with
a trailer, make wider turns
than normal.Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
When you towa trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with yourChevrolet dealer. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn
or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps
will alsoflash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. something
If
goes wrong, your rig
could start to move.People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, the
green arrows on your
instrument panel will flashfor turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they
are not. It’s
important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to lower
a
gear before you start
down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift
down, you mighthave to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no
longer work well.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until thechocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes.Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift toPARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
On a long uphill grade,shift down and reduce your speed
to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of
engine and transaxle overheating.
If you are towing a trailer, you may prefer to drive
in
DRIVE (D) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)
(or, as you need to, alower gear).
4-37
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a will
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehiclewill need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule
for more
Apply your regular brakesand hold the pedal down
on this. Things that are especially
.importantin trailer
while you:
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
Start your engine;
engine oil, belt, cooling system and brake adjustment.
Each of these is coveredin this manual, and the Index
0 Shift into a gear; and
will helpyou find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
0 Release the:parking brake.
a good idea to review these sections before
you start
Let up an the brake pedal.
your trip.
Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
Check periodicallyto see that all hitch nuts
and bolts
Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. are tight.
0Section
I
Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occuron the road.
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-13
5-15
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Cooling System
5-24
5-24
5-35
5-36
IfaTire Goes Flat
Changing
Flat
a Tire
Compact
Spare
Tire
IfYou’reStuck:InSand,Mud,
Ice or Snow
5-1
Press the switch (located near the ignition switch) to
flash on and
--. make your front and rear turn signal lamps
off. Your hazard warning flashers work
no matter what
position your keyis in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, pressthe switch again. When
the hazard warning flashers
are on, your turn signals
won’t work.
Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They
also let police know you
have a problem.Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
5-2
-
Other WarningDevices
If you carry reflective triangles, youcan set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery hasrun down, you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables start
to your Chevrolet.
But please follow the steps below to do it safely.
~
~-
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result
in costly damage
to your vehiclethat wouldn’t be covered byyour
warranty. Trying to start your Chevroletby
pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could
damage yourvehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
0 They contain enough electricityto burn you.
If you don’t follow these
steps exactly, someor all
of these thingscan hurt you.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system with
a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables
can reach, butbe sure the vehicles aren’ttouching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t beable to
start your Chevrolet,and the badgrounding could
damage the electrical systems.
5-3
To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put your
automatic
transaxle in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all
lamps that aren’t neededas well as radios. This will
avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries.And it
could save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. (Your
vehicle’s battery is located under the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.)
I
A
J:
I
5 . Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals
on each battery.Your Chevrolet has a remote
positive (+)jump starting terminal.The terminal
is on the same side
of the engine compartment as
your battery.You should always use the remote
positive (+) terminal insteadof the positive(+)
terminal on your battery.
To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, lift the red plastic cap.
2
.
C
c
An electric fan can start up even when the engineis
not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing
and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
5-4
6. Check that thejumper cables don’t haveloose or
missing insulation.If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.You don’t
need to add water to the Delco Freedom@battery
installed in every
new GM vehicle. But ifa
battery has filler caps,be sure the right amount
of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid
that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Before you connect the cables, here aresome basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a metalengine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-), or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other
parts, too.
A CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts
once the engines are running.
~
5-5
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connectit
to the positive(+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle hasone.
... .
. .....,..
7. Connect the red positive(+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
I
Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step.The other end
of the negativecable
doesn ’Igo to the
dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted, metal part on the engine
of
the vehicle withthe dead battery.
5-6
13. Remove the cables in reverse order toprevent
electrical shorting. Takecare that they don’ttouch
each other or any other metal.
-
B
+
0
@
10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not nearengine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back tothe
battery is much less.
and run
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
the engine for a while.
-
A
C
+
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
12. Try to start the vehicle with thedead battery.
If it won’t start after afew tries, it probably
needs service.
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a Chevrolet dealer aorprofessional towing
service tow your vehicle.
If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting,or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not be correct.
f
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment.
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations.The operator may want to
see them.
5-8
To help avoidinjury toyou or others:
0 Never let passengers ride in
a vehicle that is
being towed.
0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
0 Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
0 Never get under yourvehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
0 Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chainswhen towing it.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
A vehicle can fall froma car carrier if it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage.The
vehicle should be tightly secured with
chains or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
When your vehicle is beingtowed, have the ignition
turned to theOFF position. The steering wheel should
be clamped in a straight-ahead position, withclamping
a
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lockfor this. The transaxle
should be inNEUTRAL (N) and the parking
brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels,
unless you must.If the vehicle must be towed on
the
drive wheels, be sure to
follow the speed and distance
restrictions later in this section or your transaxle will be
damaged. If these limitations mustbe exceeded, then the
drive wheelshave to be supported on a dolly.
5-9
Front Towing
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or
fascidfog lamp damage
will occur. Usewheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
car-carrier securing.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage avehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, raise the
vehicle until
adequate clearanceis obtained between the
ground and/orwheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using
car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the
T-hook slots.
5-10
Attach T-hook chains in
front of the wheels, into the
side slotsof the cradle, on
both sides.
Rear Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 k h ) , 50 miles (80 km)
A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels
when towing from the rear:
These slots are to be used when loading or securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate
safety chain around the
outboard end of each
lower control arm.
5-13
i
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the rear
bumper valance will be damaged.Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
car-carrier securing.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage
a vehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle to
ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help
avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise the
vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained
between the ground and/orwheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
I
5-12
Attach T-hook chains into
the slots in the bottom
of
the floor pan support rails,
just ahead of the rear
wheels, on both sides.
These slots are to be used when loading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate safety
chain around the outboard
end of both lateral arms.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning
light about a hot engine on yourinstrument panel. See
“Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and“Engine
Coolant Temperature WarningLight” in the Index. You
also have a LOW COOLANT light on your
instrument
panel. See “Low Coolant Light” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine
GAL JON:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you
badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away
from the engine
if you see or hear steamcoming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign
of steam or coolant before
you
open thehood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or
others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine
if
it overheats, andget out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-13
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning
but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get alittle too hot when you:
Climb a long hill ona hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign
of steam,
try this for a minuteor so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
2. Turn on your heater tofull hot at the highestfan
speed and openthe window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a trafficjam, shift to NEUTRAL(N);
otherwise, shift tothe highest gear while driving
which is AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(0).
5-14
If you nolonger have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower
for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’tcome back on, youcan
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you
can idle theengine
for two or three minutes whileyou’re parked, to see if
the warning stops.But then, if you still havethe
warning, turn o f t h e engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what
you'll see:
3.4L DOHC (Code X) Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
3100 (Code M) Engine
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Fans
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Fans
5-15
'TILJ:
J
An electric fan under the hood can start up even
when the engineis not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
I
r.,
3,
If the coolantinside the coolant recovery tankis boiling,
don't do anything else until it cools down.
The coolant level should be
at orabove theCOLD mark
on a cold engine. The coolant level should be at or
above the HOT mark on
a hot engine.
If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
5-16
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant
level
isn’t at theCOLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean
water (preferably distilled) andDEX-COOL@
(silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See
“Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
parts, canbe very hot.Don’t touch them. Ifyou
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine
if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant.That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned.
Get any leakfixed beforeyou drive thevehicle.
I
NOTICE:
I
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to
see if the electric engine fans are running.If the engine
is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they
aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol, can
boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain wateror the wrongmix, your engine could
get toohot butyou wouldn’t getthe overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and
you or
others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL@coolant.
5-17
I NOTICE:
In cold weather, water canfreeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolantand the proper
coolant mix.
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and itwill burn if the engineparts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot
engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank
is at the
COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s
one more
thing you can try.You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is
cool beforeyou do it.
5-18
'A
I
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burnyou badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the
cooling system, including
the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to cool if youever haveto
turn the pressure cap.
--
--
5-19
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
NOTICE:
~~
2. Then keep turning
the pressurecap, but
now pushdown as you
turn it. Remove the
pressure cap.
Your engine hasa specific radiator fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedurecould causeyour
engine to overheat
and be severely damaged.
1. You can remove the
radiator pressurecap
when the cooling
system, including the
radiator pressurecap and
upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot.Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwiseuntil it
first stops. (Don’t press
down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-20
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolanton a hotengine.
3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air
bleed valve.
3100 V6 (VIN Code M): There are two bleed valves.
One is locatedon the thermostat housing.The other is
located on the thermostat bypass tube.
3.4L DOHC V6 (VINCode X): There are two bleed
valves. They are located on the thermostat housing and
heater outlet pipe.
5-21
4. Fill the radiator with the
proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture,
up to the baseof
the filler neck.
If you see a stream of coolant comingfrom an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the
valves after the radiator is filled.
5. Rinse or wipeany spilled coolant from theengine
and the compartment.
5-22
6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD mark.
7. Put the cap backon the coolant recovery tank, but
off.
leave the radiator pressure cap
10. Then replace the
pressure cap. At any
time during this
procedure if coolant
begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall
the pressure cap.Be
sure thearrows on the
pressure cap line up
like this.
8. Start the engine and let it run until youcan feel the
upper radiatorhose getting hot. Watch outfor the
engine fans.
11. Check the coolantin the recovery tank.The level in
the coolant recovery tank should
be at the HOT
mark when theengine is hot or at theCOLD mark
when the engine is cold.
9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower,add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-23
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusualfor a tire to“blc>w Out’’while you’re driving, If a tire goes flat, avoidfurther tire and wheel damage
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes’by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on your hazard
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak
out slowly.
warning flashers.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here
are a few
tips about what to expect
and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip
the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to
a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
A CAUTION:
Changing a tire can causean injury. The vehicle
can slipoff the jack and roll over youor other
people. You and they could be badly
injured.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a Find a level placeto change your tire. To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a
foot from the
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
2. Put the shift leverin PARK (P).
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
3. Turn off the engine.
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
To be even morecertain the vehicle won’t move,
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible.
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
That would bethe tire on theother side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-24
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
t-.....
....
Removing the Spare Tire andTools
..........
..........
.....
.....
.....
.....
c
The following steps willtell you how to use the
jack and
change a tire.
1
The equipment you’ll need
is in the trunk. Pull the
carpeting from thefloor of
the trunk. Turn the center
nut on the compact spare
cover counterclockwiseto
remove it. Then lift and
remove the cover.
Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and
remove it. Then lift off the
spacer and remove the spare
tire. See “Compact Spare
Tire’’ later in this section for
more information about the
compact spare.
5-25
Turn the nut holding
the jack and wrench
counterclockwiseand removeit. Then remove thejack
and wrench.
5-26
If there is a wheel cover,loosen the nutcaps with the
wheel wrench. They won’tcome off. Then, using the
flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the
wheel cover until it comes off. Be careful; theedge
may be sharp. Don’ttry to remove the cover with
your bare hands.
To remove a centercap, use the wrench to.pry gently at
the notch. Don’tuse a tool thatis narrower than the
wrench to pry at this notch.
If your vehiclehas wheel nut caps, remove
them using
the wheel wrench.
5-27
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing
the Spare Tire
3. Position thejack under
the vehicle and raise the
jack lift head until itfits
firmly into the notchin
the vehicles frame
nearest the flat tire.
Put the compact spare
tire near you.
I
.
.
.
-..,
,..
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosenall the wheel nuts.
Don't remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the
jack lift
head a few inches.
5-28
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicleslips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by
jack.
a
A CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicleby turning thejack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the
ground for the spare tire tofit under the vehicle.
5. Remove all wheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.
5-29
6. Remove anyrust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
A CAUTION:
-
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make
the wheel nuts
become looseafter a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a
wheel, removeany rust or dirtfrom the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to,to get all the rust or
dirt off.
'A
CAUTION:
Never use oilor grease onstuds or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causinga serious accident.
5-30
7. Replace the wheel nuts
with therounded end
of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
8. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-31
9. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
I NOTICE:
Improperly tightenedwheel nuts canlead to
brake pulsation and rotor
damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
10. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the
trunk
until you have the flattire repaired or replaced.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure get
to new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can andhave the
nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft
(140 Nom).
5-32
I NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.If
you try to puta wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover
or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
Storing a jack,
a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
L
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to storethe flat tirein your trunk. Usethe
following procedure to securethe flat tire in the trunk.
Put the flat tire in the trunkso the side that faces out
when it is on the vehicle is facing down.
The full-size
tire will notfit down into the well.Place it so the frontis
in the well and the rear
is out of the well.
Put the bolt throughone of the wheelnut holes, install
the retainer over the bolt, then install the wing nut. Put
the spacer and nut next to the tire
in the well. Store the
cover as far forward as possible.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with
a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare” in the Index.See the storage
instructions label to replace your
compact spare into
your trunk properly.
When you install the wheelcover on the full-size tire,
tighten the nut caps to 5 lb-ft (7 N-m).
5-33
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
I
1. Nut
2. Cover
3. Wing Nut
A CAUTION:
4. Spacer
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipmentin the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause
In a sudden stop or colIision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Storeall these
in the proper place.
5 . Compact SpareTire
6. Wrench
injury.
7. Nut
5
8. Retainer
9. Jack
10. Bolt
5-34
Compact Spare Tire
Although thecompact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare
tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want.Of course, it’s best to replace your
spare with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. Your
spare will last longer and be in good shape inyou
case
need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails.The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t useyour compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix yourcompact spare tire or wheel with
other wheelsor tires. They won’tfit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damageyour vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-35
I NOTICE:
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want do
to when your vehicleis stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast.The method knownas
“rocking” can help youget out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
Spinning yourwheels can destroy partsof your
vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin thewheels
too fastwhile shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
I
If you let your tires spin
at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And,
the transaxleor other partsof the vehicle can
overheat. Thatcould cause an engine
compartment fire or other
damage. When you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little aspossible. Don’t
spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-36
I
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then
shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as littleas possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle
is in gear. If
that doesn’t getyou out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you
do need to be towed out. see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
NOTES
5-37
NOTES
0 Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Here you will findinformation about the care of your Chevrolet.This section beginswith service and fuel
information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricantlevels. There is also technicalinformation
about your vehicle, and a partdevoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-7
6-11
6- 17
6-18
6-22
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-3 1
6-32
6-32
6-39
6-39
6-47
6-47
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Halogen Bulbs
Windshield WiperBlade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Chevrolet
6-50
6-5 1
6-5 1
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-56
6-56
6-66
Cleaning the Built-InChild Restraint
Care of Safety Belts and Built-inChild
Restraint Harness
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
Weatherstrips
Cleaning the Outside of Your Chevrolet
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Sheet Metal Damage
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
Electrical System
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
6-1
Service
Your Chevrolet dealer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with We
it. hope you’llgo to
your dealerfor all your service needs. You’ll get
genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported
service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your
GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
n
@H”
Delco
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want todo some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper Chevrolet Service Manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your
Chevrolet
than this manual can.To order the proper service
manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
6-2
You can be injured and yourvehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, theproper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
0 Be sure touse the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can beeasily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners,parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outsideof your vehicle can
affect the aifflowaround it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshieldwasher performance. Check with
your Chevrolet dealer beforeadding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated
at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum,it should meet specifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specificationshave been
developed by the AmericanAutomobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicleperformance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability and
emission control system protection compared to
other gasolines.
Be sure the postedoctane is at least 87.If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavyknocking noise when
you drive. If it’s badenough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.But
don’t worry if you heara little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up ahill. That’s normal,
and you don’thave to buy ahigher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhoodtune-up label), it
is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not availablein states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, butemission control system performance
may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test.If this occurs, return to your
authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis todetermine
the cause of failure. Inthe event it isdetermined that the
cause of the conditionis the typeof fuels used, repairs
may not becovered by your warranty.
Some gasolines thatare not reformulatedfor low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing
additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT);
ask your service station operator whether
or not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines.I€fuels containing “T are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected.
The
malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel
may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized
Chevrolet dealerfor service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
To provide cleaner air,all gasolines in the United States
If you planon driving in another
country outside the United
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent depositsfrom forming in your engine andfuel
system, allowing your emission control system
to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to thefuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area to
help clean theair.General Motors recommends that
you
use these gasolinesif they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contams methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system
and also damage
plastic and rubberparts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
States or Canada,
the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never
use leaded gasoline
or any otherfuel not recommendedin the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of
improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your
m
a
n
@
.
To check onfuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business the
in
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address
for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7
6-4
Filling Your Tank
A CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don't smoke if you're near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
, .
gr
"$
6-5
The tethered cap is behind a hinged door on theleft side
of your vehicle.
I
L
If you get gasoline on yourselfand then
something ignites it,
you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the
fuel filler captoo quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and
is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap
slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop.Then unscrew
the cap all the
way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline
from
painted surfacesas soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Chevrolet” in the Index.
While refueling, let thecap hang by the tether below the
fuel fill opening.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring init; if you let
go of the cap too soon,it will spring back to the right.
6-6
When you put the cap back on, turnit to the right
(clockwise) until youhear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been leftoff or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
I NOTICE:
If you needa new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This
may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engineis not running.
Keep hands, clothingand tools awayfrom any
underhood electric fan.
Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washerand
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could beburned. Be careful notto drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-7
Hood Release
To open the hood,first
pull thehandle located
inside the vehicle near the
parking brake pedal.
Then go to the frontof the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release. Lift the
hood.
6-8
r
When you open the hood on the 3 100 (Code M) engine, you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Fill Cap
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E. Engine Oil Dipstick
F. Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Dipstick
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir
H. Air Filter
I. Remote Positive Battery
Terminal
J. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
K. Battery (located under
Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir)
When you open the hoodon the 3.4L DOHC (Code X) engine, you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Fill Cap
C . Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
D. Engine Oil FillCap
E. Engine Oil Dipstick
6-10
E Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Dipstick
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir
H. Air Filter
I. RemotePositiveBattery
Terminal
.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
K. Battery (located under
Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir)
J
Before closing the hood,be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then just pull the hood down and closeit firmly.
Engine Oil
LOW
OIL
If the LOW OIL light on the
instrument panel comes on,
it means you need tocheck
your engine oil level right
away. For more
information, see “Low Oil
Level Light” in the Index.
You should check your
engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
It’s a goodidea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order toget an accurate reading, theoil must
be warm andthe vehicle mustbe on level ground.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3.4L DOHC (Code X)
Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop near
the front of the engine.
Turn off the engine and givethe oil a few minutes to
drain back into theoil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-11
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Oil
If you have the3.4L DOHC engine (VIN Code X),
allow up to 20 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the
oil pan.
If the oil is at orbelow the lower mark,then you’ll need to
add at least onequart of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This part explains what kindof oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in
the Index.
Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or
cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
3.4L DOHC (Code X)
Engine
6-12
What
nd of Oil to Use
Oils recommendedfor your vehiclecan be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oilhas been certifiedby the American
Petroleum Institute (API).Do not use anyoil which
does not carry this Starburstsymbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure youuse oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
3100 (Code M) Engine
The engine oil fill cap is located toward thefront of the
engine near theyellow-looped engine oil dipstick.
Be sure tofill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way
back in whenyou’re through.
If you have your oil changed for you, be sure theoil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use theproper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in thefollowing chart:
6-13
RECOMMENDED SAL VlSCOSlTT GRADE ENGINE OllS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
WOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
+ 38
+ 27
+ 16
+4
-7
-10
-
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SA€ 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-14
As shown in the chart,if you have the 3 100 engine, SAE
5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle. However,you can use
S A E 1OW-30 if it’s going tobe 0°F (-18°C) or above.
These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or
thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,such as
SAE 2OW-50.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THEEXPECTEDTEMPERATURERANGE.
I
HOT
WEATHER
As shown in thechart, if you have the 3.4L DOHC
engine, SAE 1OW-30 is best for your vehicle. However,
you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going to
be colder than
60O F (16 O C) before your nextoil change. When it’s
very cold, you should use S A E 5W-30. These numbers
on an oil container showits viscosity, or thickness. Do
not use other viscosityoils, such as SAE 2OW-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
PREFERRED
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
.bow WF
SAE sw-30
(-18%)
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY
OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
I
If you are in an area where thetemperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either anSAE 5W-30
synthetic oilor an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold startingand better protectionfor your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
6-15
If none of them is true, usethe long triphighway
maintenance schedule.Change the oil andfilter every
Don’t add anything to your oil.
Your Chevrolet dealer is
7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months -- whichever
ready to advise if you think something should be added. occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causesengine oil to
When to Change Engine Oil
break down slower.
If any one of these is true for you, use theshort tripkity
(See “Change OilSoon Light” in the Index.)
maintenance schedule:
Engine Oil Additives
0
Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularlyimportant when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such
as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
a carrier on topof
You frequently tow a trailer or use
your vehicle.
The vehicle is usedfor delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used
engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used
oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly throw
away clothingor rags containing usedengine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be areal threat to theenvironment. If you
change your own oil,be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil
of oil
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose
by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into
down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle,
sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead,
then you need to change youroil and filter every
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If
3,000 miles (5 OOO km)or 3 months -- whichever occurs
you have a problem properly disposing
of your used oil,
first. (See “Change Oil Soon Light” in the Index.)
ask your dealer, a service station
or a local recycling
center for help.
0
6-16
Air Cleaner
I
Pull out the filter.Be sure to install the air filter and
install thecover tightly when youare finished.
To check or replace the air filter, remove the four screws
and pull off the cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine whento
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
6-17
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flameif the engine
backfhes. If it isn’t there,and the engine
backfhes, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the
e n h e with
the air cleaner off.
NOTICE:
A good time tocheck your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the
engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and
filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicleis mainly driven underone or
more of these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature
regularly reaches90°F (32°C) or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire can cause
a
dirt can easily get
damaging engine fire. And,
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have theair cleaner in place when you’re driving.
6-18
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at yourChevrolet dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or youcould get a false reading on
the dipstick.
Wait at least30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid levelif you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F (82°C
to 93 "C).
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
_ _ -
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving
about 15 miles
(24 km)when outsidetemperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may have
to drive longer.
-
6-19
Checking the Fluid Level
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever
ia PARK (P).
With yaw foot on the brakepedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range,pausing for about
I
.-
,Y
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift
lever in PARR (P).
Let the engine run atidle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine,follow these steps:
0
3100 (Code M) Engine
3.4L DOHC(Code X)
Engine
1 . The transaxle fluid dipstick handleis the red loop
near the backof the engine. Pull out the dipstick and
wipe it witha clean ragor paper towel.
2. Push it back in all theway, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-20
:.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level
into the cross-hatched areaon
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick,
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluidat the
dipstick hole to bringit to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t oveflll.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3.4 L DOHC (Code X)
Engine
3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the
lower level.The fluid level mustbe in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid levelis in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in allthe way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluidto use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants’’in the Index.
I
I
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluidlevel as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid levelis obtained, push the
dipstick back inall the way.
6-21
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle
for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first,if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant whenit is low.If you have a problem with
engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your
radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant
will:
I NOTICE:
-
When addingcoolant, it is important thatyou use
only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL
is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result.
In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occursfirst. Damage causedby the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOL@
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
0
Give freezing protection down to
-34°F (-37°C).
0
Give boiling protection up 265
to O F (129 C).
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
What to Use
0
Help keep the proper
engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which
won’t damage aluminumparts. If you use this mixture,
you don’t need toadd anything else.
O
6-22
I
/!1 CAUTION:
Adding only plainwater to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil beforethe proper
coolant mixwill. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set
for the proper coolant mix. With
plain water or the wrong mix,your engine could
get toohot but you wouldn’t getthe overheat
warning. Your engine couldcatch fire and you or
others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL@coolant.
~
NOTICE:
If you usean improper coolant mix,your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged.The
repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water inthe mix can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
[f youhave to add coolant more than four
times a year,
nave your dealercheck your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have
to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-23
If this lightcomes on, it
means you’re low on
Checking Coolant
engine coolant.
LOW
COOLANT
Adding Coolant
.
.‘
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should at
be
the COLD mark or alittle higher. When yourengine is
warm, the level shouldbe up to the HOT mark or a
little higher.
6-24
If you need more coolant, addthe proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spillit.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator.
(See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.)
Radiator Pressure Cap
1 NOTICE:
I’urning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator arehot can allow steam and
scalding liquidsto blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery
tank, you will almost
never have toadd coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installedto
prevent coolant lossand possible engine damage
from overheating.Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflowtube on the radiator
filler neck.
--
I
When you replace your radiator pressurecap, an AC@
cap is recommended.
Thermostat
You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and it will burn if the engineparts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant aonhot engine.
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant throughthe radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, anAC@thermostat
is recommended.
6-25
Power Steerlag Fluid
3100 (Code M) Engine
3.4L DOHC (Code X)
Engine
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak
in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
6-26
What to Use
To determine what kindof fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid,be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If you willbe
operating your vehiclein anarea where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient
protection against freezing.
NOTICE:
0
0
Adding Washer Fluid
0
0
When using concentrated washerfluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution
to freeze
and damage your washer
fluid tank and
other partsof the washersystem. Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank
only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tankif it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Open thecap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid untilthe tank is full.
6-27
Brakes
Brake Fluid
leaking outof the brake system.If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work
at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea
to “top OF’
your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak.
If you add fluid
when your liningsare worn, then you’llhave too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.
You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
A CAUTION:
I
Your brake master cylinder reservoir
is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down.
The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to
an acceptable level during normal
brake liningwear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up.
The other reasonis that fluidis
6-28
If you havetoo much brake fluid, it
can spill on the
engine. The fluidwill burn if the engineis hot
enough. You or others could
be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
BRAKE
When yourbrake fluid falls
to a low level, your brake
warning light willcome on.
See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
What toAdd
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11’ (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean thebrake fluid reservoircap and the area
around the cap before removingit. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
1
of fluid inyour brake
With the wrong kind
system, your brakesmay not workwell, or they
may not even work at all. This could causea
crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
NOTICE:
a Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the
wrong kind of fluid.
a If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
6-29
Brake Wear
Your Chevrolet has front disc brakesand rear drum
brakes if it is equipped with the3100 engine. Ithas
four-wheel disc brakesif it is equipped with the3.4L
DOHC engine.
Some driving conditions or climates may
cause a brake
squeal whenthe brakes arefirst applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts
are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel in
nuts
the
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn proper sequence to GM specifications.
and new pads are needed.The sound may come andgo or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
you are pushing on the brakepedal firmly).
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected.
Also, the
rear brake drums should
be removed and inspectedeach
time the tires are removedfor rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to Brake linings should alwaysbe replaced ascomplete
axle sets.
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
manual under PartC “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections”.
r
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
i
6-30
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if thebrake pedal does not return to
normal height,or if there is a rapid increase pedal
in
travel. This could be a signof brake trouble.
that are wrongfor your vehicle, thebalance between
your front and rearbrakes can change -- for the worse.
The braking performanceyou’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways ifsomeone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake Adjustment
Battery
Every time you applythe brakes, with orwithout the
vehicle moving, yourbrakes adjust for wear.
Every new Chevrolet has a DelcoFreedom’ battery.
You never have to add water toone of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend Delco
a
Freedom
battery. Getone that has thereplacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicleis complex. Its
many partshave to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is tohave really good braking.
Your vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-quality
GM brake replacement parts. When you replace parts
of
your braking system -- for example, when your brake
linings weardown and you have to have new ones put
in -- be sureyou get new approved GM replacement
parts. If you don’t, your brakesmay no longer work
properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
for 25 days or
more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the
battery. This will help keepyour battery from
running down.
6-31
’ A CAUTION:
I
Batteries have acidthat can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you
aren’t careful. See66Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on workingaround a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to
learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for yaur audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Featwe” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
In this sectionyou’ll find directionsfor changing the
bulbs in some of the lamps on your Chevrolet.
See
“Replacement Bulbs”in the Indexto find the typeof
bulb you need to use.
6-32
Halogen Bulbs
A CAUTION:
I
Halogen bulbs have
pressuriz
1s inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or
others could be injured.Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bnlb package.
Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Press and turn the bulb a quarter-turn (to the leftfor
the driver’sside; to the rightfor the passenger’s side)
and removeit from the retaining ring
by gently
pulling it back and away from the headlamp.
Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp
112.
...L....
........
e
k.
3. Remove the electricalconnector from the bulb by
raising the locktab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb's base.
4. Install the electrical connectorto the bulb.
the smallest tab on
5 . Install the new bulb by inserting
the bulb baseinto the matching notchin the retaining
ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn to the right until
it stops.
6. Close the hood.
1. Open the hood. Thereis one flap on each side of
the radiator.
6-33
2, Open the flap by lifting the snap screw.
6-34
3. Position the radiator air side baffle aside and remove
the two nuts (pliers maybe required).
4. Slide the headlamp assembly outboard and gently pull
the inside of the assembly away from the vehicle.
6-35
Center High-Mouated Stoplamp
2. Turn the socket tothe left unti1 it stops and pull the
bulb and socket out of the centerhigh-mounted
stoplamp assembly.
3. Push in the bulb, turn it to the left and pull it oat of
the socket,
4. Push the new bdb into the socket and turn
it to the fight.
5. Replace the bulb and socket in the assembly.
1. Open the trunk lid. Locate the stoplamp behind the
rear seats, infront of the trunk hinges.
6-36
I
I
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
5. To remove a socket, press the tab, turn
the socket to
1. Open the trunk.Remove the convenience net if you
have one. Unhook the net from the upper wingnut.
6. Pull the bulb out. Do not twist it.
d-
I
d
2. Remove the upper
(convenience net) wing
nut, if equipped.
3. Pull the carpet away
from the rearof
the vehicle.
the left and pullit out.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket.
8. Replace the socket in the assembly.
9. Tighten the socket by turning it to the right.
10. Install the assembly andthe two lower wing nuts.
11. Replace the carpeting.
12. Replace the upper (convenience net) wing nut,
if equipped.
13. Replace the convenience net, if equipped.
4. Unscrew the tworemaining wing nuts and pull the
assembly from the body carefully.
6-37
Back-up Lamp
Dome Lamp
1. Open the trunk. The back-up lamp bulbs are in the
rear of the trunk lid.
1. Grasp the front and rear centerof the domelamp
cover at the same time. Then
squeeze and pull
downward. (To help pry the sides loose, a flat-blade
screwdriver may be used as an aid during
this procedure).
2. Press the tab on the
socket, turn the socket to
the left and pull it out.
2. Remove the old bulb from the small prongs
extending from the domelamp base plate; hook the
new bulb onto the prongs.
3. To replace the bulb cover, centerit over the base
plate, making sure both the
cover and the base plate
line up properly. Snap the cover firmly into place.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in
this section,
contact your Chevrolet dealer service department.
3. To remove the bulb, pullit out of the socket. Do not
twist the bulb.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket.
5 . Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to replace the socket.
6-38
Windshield Wiper Blade Retdacement
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the releaseclip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the blade assembly down
towards the glass to remove it fromthe wipe arm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securelyon the wiper arm
until you hear the release
clip “click” into place. For
wiper blade replacement lengthand type, also see
“Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
Tires
Your new Chevroletcomes with high-quality tires made
by a leading tire manufacturer.
If you everhave
questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain
service, see your Chevrolet Warranty booklet
for details.
Replacement bladesfor your vehicle are 22 inches
(559 mm) in length.
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at
the outer positions ofthe wiper pattern.The blades
are more accessible for removalheplacement while
in this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm awayfrom
the windshield.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-39
NOTICE:
0
0
Underinflated tirespose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tiresare cold.
Overinflated tiresare more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when youhit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your
tread is badlyworn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
I-
0
Inflation
-- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Informationlabel, which is on the
inside of the trunk lid shows the correct inflation
pressures €or your tireswhen they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
6-40
Don’t let anyone tell you
that underinflation or
overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires
donsthave enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
0 Too much heat
Tire overloading
0 Bad wear
0 Bad handling
0 Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much
air (overinflation),
you can getthe following:
0 Unusual wear
0 Bad handling
0 Rough ride
Needless damage fromroad hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a monthor more.
Don’t forgetyour compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell ifyour tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflatedeven when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
When rotating your tires,always use the correct rotation
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. pattern shown here.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
Tires should be rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear,
rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
“When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later inthis section for more information.
After the tireshave been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain thatall wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
The purpose of regular rotationis to achieve more
uniform wearfor all tires on the vehicle.The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
I
Rust ordirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from
places where thewheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you
off. (See
need to, to get all the rust or dirt
“Changing aFlat Tire” in theIndex.)
6-42
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired wellbecause of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kindand size of tires you need,look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle whenit was new had
a TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get
new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed
to give properendurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things duringnormal service on
your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number willbe followed by an “MS”
(for mudand snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have
a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates tothe system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, whichgrades tires by
treadwear, traction andtemperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold
in the United States.)The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading systemdoes .
not apply todeep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
6-43
6-44
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tirelife
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheelbalancing are not
needed. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pullingone way or the other, thealignment
may need tobe reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your wheels
may need tobe rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
I
Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nutskeep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel boltsand wheel nuts should be replaced.If the
wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum
wheels, whichcan sometimes be repaired). See your
Chevrolet dealer if anyof these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel shouldhave the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace anyof your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replacethem only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel boltsand wheel nutsfor your
Chevrolet model.
A
[ON:
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affectthe braking and handling
of your
vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou
lose control. You could have acollision in which
you or others couldbe injured.Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
I NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the
Index for
more information.
6-45
Used Replacement Wheels
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only ifits
Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is
dangerous. You can’t knowhow it’s been usedor
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you haveto replace a
wheel, usea new GM original equipmentwheel.
Tire Chains
INOTICE:
If your Chevrolet hasP225/60R16size tires,don’t
use tire chains. Theycan damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-46
manufacturer recommends it for use onyour
vehicle and tire size combinationand road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’scontacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them onthe front tires.
If you haveother tires, usetire chains only where
SAE
legal and only when you must. Use only
Class “S” type chainsthat arethe proper size for
your tires. Install them on
the front tires and
tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly
and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions.
If you can
hear the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast
or
spinning thewheels with chains on
will damage
your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaningproducts can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burstinto flame if you strike a
match or getthem on a hot partof the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
Chevrolet, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows whenyou’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Chevrolet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to
get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean,
damp cloth.
0
CarbonTetrachloride
Your Chevrolet dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type
spot lifter anda foam-type powdered cleaner. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well.
Do not use
them on vinyl or leather.
0
Acetone
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Paint Thinner
0
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
1. Always read the instructions onthe cleaner label.
2. Clean up stains as soon as youcan -- before they set.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
5 . If a ringforms after spot cleaning, clean the
entire
area immediately or it will set.
Benzene
Naphtha
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-47
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Ushg Solvent-Qpe Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove
any loose dirt.
First, seeif you have to use solvent-type cleaner at
all.
Some spots and stains will clean
off better with @
s
t
water and mild soap.
2, Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
directions on the container label.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material
and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve clemed the section, use
a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Rinse the section with clean,
a
wet sponge.
7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.
.
I
6-48
If you need to use a solvent:
1. Gently scrape excess soilfrom.the trim material with
a clean,dull knife or scraper.
2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning shauld start at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
3. Keep changingto a clean sectionof the cloth.
4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry
a
the areawith a blow dryer to help prevent
cleaning ring.
Fabric Protection
Your Chevrolet has upholstery andcarpet that has been
treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repellingoil and water,
which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keepit looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy orOily Stains
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee withcream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphaltcan
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions
described earlier.
Non-Greasy Stains
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks,wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, thensponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area witha waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left 3. If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner.
on a vehicle's seatfabric. They should be removed as
soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will
dissolve themand may cause them to spread.
6-49
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water anda clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield
and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
0
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.You
may have todo it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you
don’t get themoff quickly. Use a clean cloth anda
vinyl/leather cleaner.See your dealer forths product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and
a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipedry with a soft cloth. Then,let the
leather dry naturally.Do not use heat todry.
0
For stubbornstains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polishor shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled or stainedleather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-50
Cleaning the Built-InChild Restraint
Your built-in child restraint may be cleaned with mild
soap and lukewarm water. Don’t use household cleaners.
They may weaken the harness
or damage plastic parts.
The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the child
restraint cushion and seatback with fastener
strips. You
can remove the pad, machine wash
it in cold water ona
gentle cycle and tumble dry
it on a low heat setting.
Never bleachor iron the pad, and don’t dry clean it.
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint Harness
Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint
harness clean and dry.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in
child restraint harness. If you do, they may be
severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be
able to provide adequate protection. Clean the
safety belts and the child restraint harness only
with mildsoap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should becleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they mayhave to be scrapedoff later. If
abrasive cleanersare used on the insideof the rear
window, an electricdefogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside the
of windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@ Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder),GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beadsdo not form when you rinse
it with water.
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Chevrolet
The paint finishon your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’sfinish is to keep it
clean by washingit often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehiclein the direct raysof the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents thatare petroleum based,or
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades that contain acidor abrasives. All cleaning agents
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
the surface,or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water.
soft, clean chamoisor an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
Check the wiper blades and clean them
as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter
Weatherstrips
your vehicle.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean
cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application maybe required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.)
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dishor vehicle washing (mild detergent)soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions
under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishingof your Chevrolet
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish.You can get GM-approved cleaning
products from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and
Materials” in the Index.)
Exterior painted surfacesare subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll
over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking
new by keeping your Chevrolet garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Your Chevrolet has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint
finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
Always use waxes and polishes thatare non-abrasive and
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
made for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish.
rinsing thoroughly,dry with a soft clean towel.A wax
may then be applied.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leaveswirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finishif they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle assoon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
The surface of these wheelsis similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners
or
abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash
that has silicon carbidetire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires,use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody.
If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels
of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicleis damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away.Bare metal willcorrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can
be repaired with touch-up
materials availablefrom your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areasof finish damage canbe corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
6-54
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and
attack painted surfaceson your vehicle.This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots
etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint
job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
1
I
I
12345725
I 12 oz. (0.354 L) I
Shine
Silicone
Tire
12377964
16 oz.Cleaning
(0.473
L)
Wax
12377966
16
oz. (0.473 L)
Finish
Enhancer
Spot
cleans
gives
paint
luster
high
and
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
I
I
Shines
tires
Protects
removes
finish
and
scratches
fine
**Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed
from the vehicle.
\ ASSEMBLY
E N G l N E h Q 7f
CODE
MODEL YEAR
PLANT
This is the legal identifierfor your Chevrolet. It appears
on a plate in the front corner
of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side.You can see it if you look throughthe
windshield from outside your vehicle.The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN
is the engine code. This
code will help you identify yourengine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll findthis label on your spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label
is:
yourVIN,
/
- I
6-56
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your Chevrolet
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working
as
they should.
Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your Chevrolet, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuitbreaker in
the underhoodelectrical center. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases
to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp
system checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from
short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuit breakers,
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
This greatly
reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and afuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop untilthe motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers inthe fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When
the current
load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit untilthe problem is fixed.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the
fuse. If the
band is brokenor melted, replacethe fuse. Be sure you
replace a badfuse with a newone of the identical size
and rating.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block onthe passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull
off thecover labeled
FUSES to expose the fuses.
Additional fuses arein the underhood electrical centers
on the right and left sides
of the engine compartment.
6-57
Fuse
1
4
5
6
10
11
12
Circuit
Breaker
C
D
13
Description
Power Windows
Power Seats
14
Description
CIGARETTE LIGHTER-- Instrument
Panel and Console Cigarette Lighter
WAC-- WACControl Assembly
Solenoid Box, Mix Motor, DRL
Module, HVAC Control Head, Blower
Control Switch
HAZARD FLASHER
R.H. SPOT LAMP (S.E.O.)
UP ELECTRONICS BATTERY FEED
-- Chime Module, Electronic Brake
Control Module (EBCM),
Theft-Deterrent Module, Radio, ALDL
STARTERRELAY
ANTI-THEFTPCM-- Theft-Deterrent
Module
A B S -- Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM),A B S Relay
HVAC BLOWER MOTOR -- Blower
Motor Relay
Fuse
15
19
20
21
22
23
25
28
29
30
Description
L.H. SPOT LAMP (S.E.O.)
POWER ACCESSORY (Power)#l -Door LockSwitches, Trunk Courtesy
Lamp, O/S Mirror Switch
POWER ACCESSORY #2--(Sunroof)
Control Unit
AIR BAG-- Air BagSystem
CRUISE CONTROL--Cruise Control
Cut-Out Switch
STOPLAMPS -- TCCBrake Switch
ENGLISWMETRIC (S.E.O.)
CTSY LAMPS -- Vanity Mirrors, I P
Compartment Lamp, Header Courtesy
and Reading Lamp,US Lighted
Rearview Mirror, Dome Lamp
WIPER -- Wiper Switch
TURN SIGNAL -- Turn Signal Flasher
Fuse
32
33
37
38
39
41
42
Description
POWER LOCKS -- Door Lock Relay,
Keyless Entry Receiver
DRL MODULE
REAR DEFOG--HVAC Control
Assembly Rear Window
Defogger Switch
RADIO -- Radio, Steering Wheel
Radio Switches, Power Drop
I/P ELECTRONICS IGNITION FEED
-- Headlamp Switch, TCCBrake
Switch, Instrument Cluster, Chime
Module, Keyless Entry Receiver,
BTSI Switch
POWER DROP
ENHANCED EVAP. SOLENOID
6-59
---
Underhood Electrical Center Passenger’s Side
Some €uses are in the underhood electrical center on the
passenger’s side of the engine cornpartmeat.
0
0
0
RICMPT REL PCMBAT
A/C
CONT
TRANS
-F/INJN
PCM IGN
Fuse
R/CMPT REL
PCM BAT
A/C CONT
TRANS
6-60
ELEKIGN
I
I
Description
Remote Trunk Release,Back-up
Lamps
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump
Relay, Fan Cont#l and #2 Relay
A/C CMPR Relay(VIN M only)
Automatic Transaxle,Transaxle
Range Switch (VIN M only)
Fuse
F/INJN
PCM IGN
ELEK IGN
10
12
13
Description
Fuel Injectors
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), Mass Air Flow (MAF)
Sensor (VIN X only), EGR,
CCP, Oxygen Sensor, Vacuum
Canister Switch
Electronic Ignition (EI) Control
Module
UP Fuse Block
Passenger’s Side Underhood
Electrical Center, FPMP Relay,
Cooling Fans #I and #2, Ignition
Relay, P/N Switch
FAN CONT #I Relay
Relay
14
15
16
17
18
Description
FUEL PUMP
AIC CMPR
FAN CONT #2 -- Secondary
Cooling Fan (Passenger’sSide)
FAN CONT #1-- Primary
Cooling Fan (Driver’sSide)
Ignition Relay
6-61
I
--
Underhood Electrical Center Driver’s Side
no0
FAN #3
PARKLPS
HORN
uno
ABS
m
6-62
1
12
Fuse
FAN#3
PARK LPS
Description
FAN CONT #3 Relay
Headlamp Switch
HORN
Horn Relay, Underhood Lamp
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
Fuse
Description
11
IGN SW1 -- I/P Fuse Block:
Radio, Wiper, HVAC, ABS and
Turn Signal Fuses PWR WDO and
Circuit Breaker D; Passenger’s
Side Underhood Electrical Center:
F/IJN, ECM IGN, TCC, ENG
EMIS and ELEK IGNFuses
12
HD LPS -- Circuit Breaker to
Headlamp Switch
13
ABS -- ABS Relay
Relay
Description
14
ABS -- Anti-Lock Brake System
15
FAN CONT #3 -- Secondary
Cooling Fan (Passenger’s Side)
16
HORN
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 156 or 3057
Center High-Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891T2
Front Parkingnurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3357NA
Headlamp, High-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
9006
Headlamp, Low-Beam ....................
194
Sidemarker, Front. ........................
194
Sidemarker,Rear .........................
3057
Stop/TailiTurnSignal .....................
Interior Lamps
Bulb Number
Dome .............................
10230955
* For serviceinformation on these bulbs, contact your
Chevrolet dealer service department.
6-63
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement ........................................
After Complete Overhaul ...........................................
7 quarts (6.7 L)
10 quarts (9.5 L)
When drainingheplacing converteT more fluid may be needed.
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3100 (Code M) ................................................ 11.6 quarts (10.94 L)
12.3 quarts (11.65L)
3.4L DOHC (Code X) ...........................................
Refrigerant (R=134a), Air Conditioning* ..........................
1.88 pounds (0.85 kg)
Engine Crankcase Oil and Filter Change
3100(CodeM) ..................................................
4.5quarts(4.2L)
3.4LDOHC (Code X) .............................................
5.5 quarts (5.2 L)
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Length .......................................................
22inches(559mm)
.
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hook
Fuel Tank
3100 (Code M) ................................................
16.6 gallons (62.8 L)
16.6 gallons (62.8 L)
3.4L DOHC (Code X) ..........................................
-
*See “Air Conditioning Refrigerants” later in this section.
Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as
recommended in this manual. See “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-64
Engine Specifications
Type ..................................
Displacement ...........................
Compression Ratio .......................
Firing Order ............................
ThermostatTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3100 (CodeM)
V6
191 CID (3100)
9.6: 1
1-2-3-4-5-6
195°F (91°C)
160 @ 5200
3.4L DOHC (Code X)
V6
207 CID (3.4L)
9.25: 1
1-2-3-4-5-6
195°F (91°C)
215 @ 5200
6-65
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter
All Engines ..............
Battery
3100 (CodeM) .........
3.4L DOHC (Code X) ....
Engine Oil Filter
3100(Code M) .........
3.4L DOHC (Code X) ....
PCV Valve
3100 (Code M) .........
3.4L DOHC (Code X) . . . .
Radiator Cap
All Engines ..............
Spark Plugs
3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . .
3.4L DOHC (CodeX)
6-66
....
A1208C
600 CCA
690 CCA
PF47
PF51
CV892C
CV895C
RC27
AC Type 41-940
Gap: 0.060” (.152 cm)
AC Q p e 41-919
Gap: 0.045” (.114 cm)
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase .......... 107.5 inches (273.0 cm)
Tread Width (Front) ... 59.1 inches (151.35 cm)
Tread Width (Rear) ..... . 5 9 inches (149.4 cm)
Length ............. 200.9 inches (510.4 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.5 inches (182.6 cm)
Height ............... 55.2 inches (140.3cm)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the properrefrigerant is used.
If you’re notsure, ask your Chevrolet dealer.
&
NOTES
6-67
b%
6-68
NOTES
0Section 7
MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers the maintenance requiredfor your Chevrolet.Your vehicle needs these servicesto retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-37
7-37
7-37
7-38
7-38
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Selecting the RightSchedule
Part B: OwnerChecks and Services
At Each FuelFill
At Least Once a Month
At Least Twicea Year
At Least Oncea Year
7-4 1
7-4 1
7-4 1
7-41
7-4 1
7-4 1
7-42
7-44
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot andSeal Inspection
ExhaustSystemInspection
RadiatorandHeaterHoseInspection
Throttle Linkage Inspection
BrakeSystemInspection
Part D: Recommended
Fluids
and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
I
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
I
I
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet,or your
Chevrolet dealer for details.
7-2
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the qualityof the airwe breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation
can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this sectionis divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices” shows
what tohave done and how often.Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’sservice department or another qualified
service centerdo these jobs.
a vehicle can
Performing maintenance work on
be dangerous. In trying
to do some jobs,you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work onlyif you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have
a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks andServices” tells you what
should be checked and when. Italso explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle good
in condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains
important inspections that yourChevrolet dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained.These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether
you do the work
yourself orhave it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place
for you to record themaintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to writeit down in this part.This will help you
determine when your nextmaintenance should be done.
In addition,it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get
the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to helpyou keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it.You may drive very short
distances only a few times
a week. Or you may drive
long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to
do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
You may even need
more frequent checks and
replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section.
So please read this
section and notehow you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your Chevrolet dealer.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedPain
rt D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses these. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle.
These schedules arefor vehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label.See “Loading Your
Vehicle’’ inthe Index.
0
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to
decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how
to decide which
schedule to follow:
This part tells you the maintenance servicesyou should
have done and whenyou should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained andsupported service people will
perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.
7-4
I
. ,
Maintenance Schedule
I
Wip/City
Short
Definition
I
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditionsis true for your vehicle:
Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (suchas frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a traileror use a carrier on topof
your vehicle.
If the vehicle is usedfor delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercia1 application.
One of the reasons you should follow thisschedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is thatthese conditions cause engine oil to break
down soone7:
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles(83 000 km):Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km):Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Then Every
15,000 Miles(25 000 km): Camshaft Timing Belt
Inspection (3.4LCode X engine only).
Every 100,000 Miles(166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km):Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whicheveroccurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure tofollow the complete maintenance schedule
on the following pages.
--
Maintenance Schedule
Follow this maintenanceschedule only if none of the
conditions from theShort TripKity Maintenance
Schedule is true.Do not use thisschedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, drivenin a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use the Short
TripKity schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slowex
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
'Replacement. Fuel Tank,Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles(83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditionsonly).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km):
Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
At 60,000 Miles (100000 km) Then Every
15,000 Miles (25000 km): Camshaft Timing Belt
Inspection (3.4L Code X engine only).
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km):Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles(240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule
on thefollowing pages.
--
7-6
I
i
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-1
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) shouldbe performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 krn).
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the
failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s usefullife. We, however,
urge that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance
be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection’’ under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspection” in PartC of this schedule.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
i
1
t
u o
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED BY: I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Scb-We.
lS9000Miles (30 000 km)
I
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
0Change engine oiland filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
I
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED €&X
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
27,900 Miles (45 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
’
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
7-11
1
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
1
33,000 Miles (55000 km)
Change engine oil and Mter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
ACTUALMILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
I
39,000 Miles (65000 km)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
BY:
7-13
I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I
42,000 Miles (70000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission ControlService.
0Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replacefilter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
-
(.Seefuotnote +.)
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches90 O F
(32 O C) or lugher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluidandfilter do not require changing.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-15
I I
3
I
1 , Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
1
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
L
7-16
J
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
57,000 Miles (95000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0Vehicles with 3.4L Code X engine only:
Inspect camshaft timing belt.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
n 4n
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replaceparts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” inthe Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
n
4 n
BY
An Emission Control Service.
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
BY:
I
I
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY: I
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
BY:
,
7-19
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
0Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
in dusty conditions. Replacefilter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
c1 Inspect camshaft timing belt.
An Emission Control Service.
d
1
ACTUALMILEAGESERVICED
7-20
BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedu
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
An Emission Control Sewice.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
t
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-22
1
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect camshaft timing belt.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote ?.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
17Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-23
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission ControlService.
0Change engine oil and filter (or
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
I
1
1
DATE
ACTUAL
ACTUAL MILEAGE
IL
7-24
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches 90OF
(32°C) or higher.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED BY: I
(Continued)
7-25
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
Ifyou do not useyour vehicle under anyof these
conditions, thefluid andfilter do
not require changing.
I
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first).See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission ControlService.
DATE
7-26
ACTUAL MILEAGE
1
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
I
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
The services shown inthis schedule upto 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the sameintervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles(240 000 km) should be performedat
the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km).
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warrantyor limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
+ A good
time to check your brakes is during
tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’in Part C of this schedule.
7-27
ILong Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote+.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern andadditional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
7-28
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
lsERvIcED BY:(
I LongTripmighwayMaintenanceSchedule I
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-29
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
Change engineoil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I 50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as foundin taxi, police or
delivery service.
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluid andfilterdo not require changing.
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
7-30
ACTUAL MILEAGE DATE
BY:
1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
I7 Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An EmissionControl Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL MILEAGE
1
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
R
31
(g
Tripmighway Maintenance Schedul&l
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0Vehicles with 3.4L Code X engine only:
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
Inspect camshaft timing belt.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replaceparts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
An Emission Control Service.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
Long TripEIighway Maintenance Schedule
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
0Inspect camshaft timing belt.
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
An Emission Control Service.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
3
I
BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
n
aa
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace partsas needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect camshaft timing belt.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote T.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission ControlService.
DATE
7-34
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Inspect spark plug wires.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
An Emission Control Service.
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
t
0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
SERVICED BY:
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
I
(Continued)
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(or every60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the
cooling system and pressure cap.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these
conditions, thefluid andfilterdo not require changing.
An Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
7-36
BY:
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
1
I
BY:
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are ownerchecks and services which
should be performedat the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability andemission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check theengine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever anyfluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure theyare the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each FuelFill
It isimportantfor you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check theengine oil level andadd the proper oilif
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Indexfor
further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
if
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Oncea Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See
“Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
7-37
At Least Twicea Year
Restraint System Check
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.See
“Automatic Transaxle”in the Index.A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
Make sure the safety belt
reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are
working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child
At Least Oncea Year
restraint, also periodically make sure
the harness straps,
latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and
anchorages are
working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged Key Lock Cylinders Service
safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts.
If
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with
the lubricant
you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-inspecified in Part D.
child restraint systemfrom doing itsjob, have it
repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts or harness Body Lubrication Service
straps replaced.
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including [nose
for the
hood, rearcompartment, glove box door and the
console
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
door. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
and have them repaired or replaced.
(The air bagsystem
lubrication may be required when exposed to
a
does not need regularmaintenance.)
corrosive environment.
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper bladesfor wear or cracking.Replace blade
inserts that appearworn or damaged or that streakor
m i s s areas of the windshield.Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-38
Starter Switch Check
7
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. Ifit does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not usethe accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the
engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the starter works in any other position, your vehicle
needs service.
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
I
/h CAUTIC’
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. Ifit does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have
enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply theparking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key tothe RUN
position, but don’tstart the engine. Withoutapplying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever ofout
PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever
moves outof PARK (P), your vehicle’sBTSI
needs service.
7-39
Ignition Transaxle LockCheck
While parked, and with the parking brakeset, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is inPARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property
could be damaged.Make
sure thereis room infront of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should thevehicle begin to move.
7-40
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall).You should let your GM dealer’s service
department or other qualified service center do these
jobs.
Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services maybe
found in a GM service manual.See “Service and Owner
Publications” inthe Index.
holes, looseconnections or other conditions which could
cause a heatbuild-up in the floor panor could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect thehoses and have them replacedif they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect the throttle linkagefor interference or binding,
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle and for damaged or missing parts.Replace parts as
needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signsof
wear or lackof lubrication. Inspectthe power steering
lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect thecomplete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Lookfor broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as openseams,
excessive wear.Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect thecomplete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake,
etc.
Check parking brake adjustment.You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions resultin frequent braking.
7-41
~
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification maybe obtained from your
GM dealer.
USAGE
Coolant
Supplement
Sealer
FLUIDLUBRICANT
GM Part No. 3634621 or
equivalent with a complete flush
and refill.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
System
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
@
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
7-42
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.
To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@
or Havoline@ DEX-COOL@
coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or eauivalent.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part No. 12346241
or euuivalent).
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Fuel Door Hinge Engine oil or LubriplateLubricant
(GM Part No. 1050109).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579or equivalent).
See “Replacement Parts” in theIndex for recommended
replacement filters and spark plugs.
7-43
Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can
be added on
After the scheduled servicesare performed, record the
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio
in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval.
is aconvenient place to store them.
Part E: Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-44
ODOMETER
SERVICED
READING
BY
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
7-45
~~
Maintenance Record
7-46
Maintenance Record
7-47
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY
7-48
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will findout how to contactChevrolet if you need assistance.This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and howto report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participationin an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8- 10
8-11
8-11
8-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealershave the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, ifconcern
a
has not
been resolvedto your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss yourconcern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can
be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service
or parts
manager, contact the ownerof the dealership orthe
General Manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
In the U S . Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
For help outsideof the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1315
In other overseas locations, call GM International
Product Center in Canada at:
(905) 644-4112.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
I
For prompt assistance, please
have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
0
0
Your name, address,home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (Thisis available
from the vehicle registrationor title, orthe plate at
the top leftof the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle deliverydate and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However,if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet MotorDivision
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities,
equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard
of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available its
at Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user
can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.)
ChevroletIGeo Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year,by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problemcannot be
resolved over thephone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membershipis free, however some
services may incur costs.
A
1
c
I
W
‘
Roadside offers two levelsof service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy” Care:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
0
Free towing for warranty repairs
0
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie.,
wrecker services,locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet’s strongcommitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited toannounce the
establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo,
membership in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-5
~~
ROADSIDE CourtesyTM Care PROVIDES:
0
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above)
Plus:
0
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
0
FREE LocksmitWKey Service (when keysare lost
on the road or locked inside)
0
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
0
FREE Jump Start (at home
or onthe road)
0
FREE Fuel Delivery($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportationfor
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with
the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warrantyto eligible purchasers
of 1997 ChevroletIGeo passengercar and light duty
trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to Retail and Retail Lease
Customers operating 1997 and newer ChevroletlGeo
vehicles for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles (60 O00 km),
whichever occurs first. AllCourtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadsideor dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Careare not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
8-6
-
I-
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet/Geo
dealer to obtain aRoadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred
for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance whencalling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
Please refer to theRoadside Assistance brochure
inside your ownerinformation portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchasedin Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure providedby the dealeror call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehiclecolor
0
Vehiclelocation
Telephone number where youcan be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation
for
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the
coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper
New
Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers
of
1997 ChevroletlGeopassenger cars and light duty
trucks (pleasesee your selling dealer for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during thesame day.
0
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part
of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. ChevroletlGeo reserves the right to make
any changes or discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time without notification.
For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years
of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburseup to $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportationmay be available under the
Courtesy TransportationProgram. Please consult your
dealer for details.The Roadside Assistance programis
available only in the United States and
Canada.
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
OR
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any
overnight warranty repairup to five days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of
In Canada,please consult yourGM dealer for
rental for any Overnight warranty repair up to five days. information on Courtesy Transportation.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
be administered by your ChevroletlGeo dealer
service management.Claim amounts should reflect
all actual costs.
8-8
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue
its
participation in thisprogram.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier inthis section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution todisagreement
a
regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied afterfollowing the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim,you will beasked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statementof the natureof your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO
LINE, but you
may contact theBBB at any time.The BBB will attempt
to resolve thecomplaint serving as an intermediary.If
this mediation is unsuccessful,an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligiblecustomers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject.If you accept the decision,GM will be
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take
about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decisionis made.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could
cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an
investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists
in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved
Some state lawsmay require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program in individual problems between you, your dealer or
or in the courts. For further information, contact the
General Motors.
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Chevrolet Customer
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada,in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write:
In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005
1908 Colonel SamDrive
Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for purchase for all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone numberfor ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, Michigan 48007-7047
8-11
1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operationand servicing of your vehiclecan be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form
in this book and mailingit in with your check, money order,
or credit card information toHelm, Incorporated (address below)
CURRENT PUBLlCAmONSFOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO
OWNER’S INFORMATION
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
electrical, steering,body, etc.
Schedule for all models.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$15.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1
0.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information neededmodel GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER'S
(ATTENTION)
NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
CODE)
(ZIP
D A W ' " TELEPHONE
NO.
I
(STATE)
0
AREA CODE
~
~~~
GM-CHE-ORD97 *(Prices are subject
to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted
in funds. Canadian residents
U.S.
are to make checks payable inUS. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
&
8-14
NOTES
0Section 9
Index
Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle . . . . . 6-3
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
How Does it Restrain ..........................
1-24
1-22
How it Works ................................
Location ....................................
1-22
Readiness Light .........................
1.21.2.50
Servicing ...................................
1-25
What Makes it Inflate ..........................
1-23
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
AirBagSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
AirConditioning ................................
3-3
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-66
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-45
6-53
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ......................
Antenna. Fixed Mast ............................
3-20
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Anti-Lock
Brake System Active Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53.4.9
Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.4.8
Brakes ......................................
4-7
Anti.Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 15
Appearancecare ...............................
6-47
Appearance Care Materials .......................
6-55
Arbitration Program ..............................
8-9
Armrest.Storage ...............................
2-39
Ashtrays ...................................... 2-41
Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-19
Audio Equipment. Adding ........................
Audio System. Tips .............................
3-18
Audio Systems ..................................
3-6
Auto-Down Window ............................
2-27
Automatic
Overdrive ...................................
2-18
Transaxlecheck .............................. 7-38
Transaxle Fluid ...............................
6-18
Transaxle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Auxiliary Power Connection ......................
2-42
B a c k - u p Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Battery .......................................
6-31
Jump Starting .................................
5-3
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry............... 2-8
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3. 5.5
BBB Auto Line .................................
8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
9-1
9-2
Wheels .....................................
6-53
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Climate Control System ...........................
3-2
Clock. Setting the ................................
3-6
Comfort Controls ................................
3- 1
Compact Disc Care .............................
3-20
Compact Disc Player ............................
3- 12
Compact Disc Player Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Compact Spare Tire .............................
5-35
Console Storage ................................
2-40
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
4-6
ConvenienceNet ...............................
2-41
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
2-39
Coolant .......................................
6-22
6-24
Adding .....................................
Bleedvalves .................................
5-21
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Heater.Engine ...............................
2-15
RecoveryTank ...............................
5-17
WhattoUse .................................
6-22
Cooling System ................................
5-15
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
8-8
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
Cruise Control .................................
2-3 1
Cupholders ...............................
2.39.2.40
. . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Damage. Finish ...............................
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................
6-54
6-54
2-34
Daytime Running Lamps .........................
DeadBattery ...................................
5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety ........................
8-10
Defensive Driving ...............................
4-2
Defogger. Rear Window ..........................
3-5
Defogging .....................................
3-5
Defrosting .....................................
3-5
Dimensions.Vehicle ............................
6-66
Dolby@B Noise Reduction .......................
3-11
Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement ....................
6-38
2-4
DoorLocks .....................................
Door Storage Compartment .......................
2-40
Drive Position. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
DriverPosition .................................
1-12
Driving
City ........................................
4-20
Defensive ....................................
4-2
Drunken .....................................
4-3
Freeway ....................................
4-21
InaBlizzard .................................
4-27
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-4
4-17
IntheRain ..................................
Night ......................................
4-15
OnCurves ..................................
4-10
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
On Hill and Mountain Roads ....................
4-23
On Snow and Ice .............................
4-26
Throughwater ...............................
4-19
WetRoads ..................................
4-17
4-25
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
With a Trailer ................................
4-3
DrunkenDriving ................................
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15.3. 19. 6.56
Electronic Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Engine ................................... 6.9. 6.10
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15
Coolant Level Check ..........................
7-37
Coolant Temperature Gage ..................... 2-54
Coolant Temperature Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Identification ................................ 6-56
OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Running While Parked ......................... 2-26
Specifications ................................
6-65
Starting Your ................................
2- 14
Engine Oil ....................................
6- 11
Adding .....................................
6-12
Additives ...................................
6-16
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Used .......................................
6-16
What Kind to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 13
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
6-4
Ethanol ........................................
Exhaust. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Exterior Lamps ................................. 2-34
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-49
FabricProtection ...............................
Fan Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
. . . . . . . 6-5
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Frangais
Filter.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
I
9-4
Filter. Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Finish Damage .................................
6-54
First Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
5-2
Flat Tire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
FloorMats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Fluids and Lubricants ............................ 7-42
Foreign Countries. Fuel ...........................
6-4
Four-Way Manual Front Seat ......................
1-3
..
FrenchLanguageManual ........................... 11
Front Parking Bulb Replacement................... 6-33
FrontTowing .................................. 5-10
Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Fuel ..........................................
6-3
Canadian ....................................
6-3
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-4
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 2-54
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
GloveBox .................................... 2-39
4-30
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
4-30..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Guide en
GVWR .......................................
4-30
Halogen Bulbs ................................ 6-32
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Bulb Replacement ............................ 6-32
High/Low Beam Changer ......................
2-29
On Reminder ................................
2-34
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
HearingDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance .............. 8-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
4-23
HillandMountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Hitches. Trailer .................................
4-34
Hood
Checking Things Under .........................
6-7
Release ......................................
6-8
Horn .........................................
2-27
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13
Illumination. Sustained Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
ExhaustSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Front Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Front Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Radiator and Heater Hose ...................... 7-41
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Suspension ..................................
7-41
Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Instrumentpanel ...............................
2-44
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Cleaning ....................................
6-50
Cluster ................................
2.46.2.47
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Interior Lamps .................................
2-35
Jack. Tire ....................................
Jump Starting ...................................
5-26
5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service .....................
Key Reminder Warning ..........................
Keys ..........................................
7-38
2-14
2-2
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Tire-Loading Information ......................
4r29
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Lamps ........................................
2-34
2-35
Courtesy ....................................
Exterior ....................................
2-34
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Leaving Your Vehicle ............................. 2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-23
2-41
Lighter .......................................
Lights
Air Bag Readiness .......................
1.21.2.50
Anti-Lock Brake System Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53.4.9
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.4.8
Brake SystemWarning ....................
2.51.6.29
2-59
ChangeOilSoon .............................
2-50
Charging System .............................
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-53
Interior .....................................
2-35
Low Coolant Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54.6.24
Low Oil Level Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58.6.11
2-57
Oil Warning .................................
1.7.2.49
Safety Belt Reminder ......................
Security ....................................
2-59
Service Engine Soon ..........................
2-55
4-29
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
Locks .........................................
2-4
7-38
Cylinders ...................................
Door ........................................
2-4
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
7-38
2-5
PowerDoor ..................................
RearDoorSecurity .............................
2-5
Steering Column Park Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
2-10
Trunk ......................................
Window ....................................
2-27
4-14
Loss of Control ................................
Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54.6.24
Low Oil Level Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58.6.11
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-42
7-38
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
9-6
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
MaintenanceRecord ............................
7-44
Maintenance Schedule ............................
7-1
7-27
Long Tripmighway ...........................
Long Tripmighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Long Tripmighway Intervals .....................
7-6
Owner Checks and Services.....................
7-37
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-7
Short Trip/City ................................
Short Trip/City Definition .......................
7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ........................
7-5
Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
2-55
ManualFrontSeat ...............................
1-2
2-38
Manual Remote Control Mirror ....................
6-4
Methanol ......................................
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2-38
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
Manual Remote Control ........................
2-38
Power Outside ...............................
2-38
Visorvanity .................................
2-42
MMT .........................................
6-4
Mode Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
MountainRoads ................................
4-23
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
N e t . Convenience ..............................
Neutral. Automatic Transaxle .....................
New Vehicle “Break-In” .........................
Nightvision ...................................
2-41
2- 18
2- 13
4-16
Odometer ....................................
2-48
Odometer. Trip .................................
2-48
Off-Road Recovery .............................
4- 12
6-11
Oil. Engine ....................................
Oil Warning Light ..............................
2-57
Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 18
Overheating Engine .............................
5- 13
Owner Checks and Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
8- 12
Owner Publications. Ordering .....................
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
Park
Automatic Transaxle ..........................
Shifting Into .................................
Shifting Out of ...............................
Parking
AtNight ....................................
Brake ......................................
Brake and Automatic TransaxlePARK (P)
Mechanism Check ...........................
Lots .......................................
Over Things That Burn ........................
With a Trailer ................................
Parking On Hills. Leaving ........................
Passenger Position ..............................
6-54
2- 17
2-21
2-24
2-11
2-20
7-40
2-11
2-25
4-37
4-38
1-20
............................. 4-13
Passing
..6.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PASS-Key I1 .................................
2-11
Periodic Maintenance Inspections .................. 7-41
Power
Door Locks ...................................
2-5
OptionFuses ................................
6-57
Outside Mirror ...............................
2-38
Seat .........................................
1-4
4-10
Steering ....................................
Steering Fluid ................................
6-26
2-27
Windows ...................................
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ....................
1-19
Problems on the Road ............................
5-1
Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Radiator .....................................
5-20
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Radio Reception ................................
3-18
Radios ........................................
3-6
Rain. Driving In ................................
4-17
Rain. OtherTips ................................
4-19
2-37
ReadingLamps ................................
Rear
Door Security Locks ...........................
2-5
Outside Seat Position .....................
1.27. 1.50
1-30
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
SeatPassengers ...............................
1-27
Towing .....................................
5-11
3-5
WindowDefogger .............................
Rearview Mirror.Insi‘de Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
9-7
SecurityLight ..................................
2-59
Security System ................................
2- 1 1
Service ........................................
6-2
Bulletins. Ordering ............................
8- 12
EngineSoonLight ............................
2-55
Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
Parts Identification Label .......................
6-56
Publications. Ordering .........................
8- 12
Publications. Ordering in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11
Work. Doing Your Own .........................
6-2
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Service Publications .............................
8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-54
ShiftLever ....................................
2-16
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 16
Into Park (P) .................................
2-21
2-24
OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster.....................
1- 14
SignalingTurns ................................
2-29
4-14
Skidding ......................................
Sound Equipment. Adding........................
3- 19
Spare Tire
Compact ....................................
5-35
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire . 5-28
Specifications and Capacities ......................
6-64
Specifications.Engine ...........................
6-65
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
2-48
Speedometer ...................................
6-47
Stains. Cleaning ................................
Starter Switch Check ............................
7-39
Starting Your Engine ............................
2-14
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Column Park Lock Check ......................
7-40
In Emergencies ...............................
4-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Wheel. Tilt ..................................
2-28
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................
3-17
Storage Compartments ...........................
2-39
Storage. Vehicle ................................
6-31
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Sunvisors ....................................
2-41
Sunroof .......................................
2-43
...
Symbols.Vehicle ................................
vm
Synchronization. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tachometer ..................................
2-48
Taillamp Bulb Replacement .......................
6-37
TapePlayerCare ...............................
3-19
Temperature Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
3-15
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..........................
THEFTLOCK ................................
3-15
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
2-28
Tilt Steering Wheel .............................
Time. Setting the ................................
3-5
6-46
Tirechains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TireLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
TM
9-9
Tires .........................................
6-39
Alignment and Balance ........................ 6-45
BuyingNew .................................
6-43
Chains .....................................
6-46
ChangingaFlat ..............................
5-24
Cleaning ....................................
6-54
Compact Spare ...............................
5-35
Inflation ....................................
6-40
Inflationcheck ...............................
7-37
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 1
4-29
Loading ....................................
Pressure ....................................
6-40
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Temperature .................................
6-44
6-44
Traction ....................................
Treadwear ...................................
6-44
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-43
6-46
Used Replacement Wheels ......................
6-42
WearIndicators ..............................
Wheel Replacement ...........................
6-45
6-42
When It’s Time for New .......................
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
TorqueLock ...................................
2-24
Torque, Wheel Nut ..............................
5-32
4-31
Towing a Trailer ................................
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle .............................
Trailer
4-36
Backingup .................................
4-35
Brakes .....................................
4-37
Driving on Grades ............................
Driving with .................................
4-35
FollowingDistance ...........................
4-36
4-34
Hitches .....................................
4-38
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-36
MakingTurns ................................
ParkingonHills ..............................
4-37
Passing .....................................
4-36
Safety Chains ................................
4-35
Tongueweight ...............................
4-33
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Towing .....................................
4-31
Turnsignals .................................
4-37
4-33
Weight .....................................
Transaxle Fluid, Automatic .......................
6-18
Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Transportation,Courtesy ..........................
8-8
Trip, Before Leaving ............................
4-22
Trip Odometer .................................
2-48
TrUnk
Lock .......................................
2-10
2-10
Release, Remote ..............................
TTYUsers .....................................
8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
7-40
Underbody Flushing Service .....................
UnderbodyMaintenance .........................
6-54
Underhood Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.60.6.62
9-10
. . .
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Damagewarnings ..............................
vii
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
IdentificationNumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Storage .....................................
6-3...1
Symbols .....................................
vi11
Ventilation System ...............................
3-4
VisorVanity Mirrors ............................
2-41
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Wheel
Alignment ..................................
6-45
NutTorque ..................................
5-32
6-45
Replacement .................................
Wrench .....................................
5-26
Window Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Power ......................................
2-27
WindshieldWasher .............................
2-30
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30.6.27
FluidLevelCheck ............................
7-37
Windshield Wipers .............................. 2-30
BladeReplacement ........................... 6-39
Fuses ...................................... 6-57
Winter Driving .................................
4-25
Wiper Blade Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Wiring. Headlamp ..............................
6-57
WreckerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Wrench. Wheel .................................
5-26
Y o u r Driving and the Road
.......................
4-1
9-11
0 Service Station Checkpoints
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
P5-17 AND P6-22
TI RES
P6-39
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
P6-11
SECONDARY
HOOD RELEASE
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
REMOTE
P6-8
FLUID
P6-27
P6-6
EATERY
TERMINAL
P5-3
HOOD FUEL
TRUNK
REMOTE
RELEASE
RELEASE
P2-10
DOOR
For detailed information,refer to the page numberlisted, or see the Index in the backof the owner's manual.
9-12
I
I